diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-07 18:58:19 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-07 18:58:19 -0800 |
| commit | d04e5e99401cc93f6b0732a7accfeee8753ff5d4 (patch) | |
| tree | fac9b0c1ca5d827ef894a84f226dadab2743c498 | |
| parent | 570a0818b9c4fe0d866ef2d908dd483d88067c53 (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-0.txt | 4635 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-0.zip | bin | 73553 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h.zip | bin | 1380196 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/55959-h.htm | 6328 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 151835 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/i_036.jpg | bin | 418530 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/i_068.jpg | bin | 172079 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/i_102.jpg | bin | 172325 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/i_142.jpg | bin | 176282 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/i_frontis.jpg | bin | 167231 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55959-h/images/i_title.jpg | bin | 80930 -> 0 bytes |
14 files changed, 17 insertions, 10963 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea75bee --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #55959 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/55959) diff --git a/old/55959-0.txt b/old/55959-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6e6d7cc..0000000 --- a/old/55959-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4635 +0,0 @@ -Project Gutenberg's The Coming of the White Men, by Mary Hazelton Wade - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - -Title: The Coming of the White Men - Stories of How Our Country Was Discovered - -Author: Mary Hazelton Wade - -Illustrator: Sears Gallagher - -Release Date: November 13, 2017 [EBook #55959] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE COMING OF THE WHITE MEN *** - - - - -Produced by Larry B. Harrison and The Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - - - - - THE COMING OF THE - WHITE MEN - - - - -[Illustration: THE NORSEMEN] - - - - - THE COMING OF THE - WHITE MEN - - Stories of How Our Country was Discovered - - BY - MARY HAZELTON WADE - AUTHOR OF "TEN LITTLE INDIANS," "TEN BIG INDIANS," - "THE LITTLE COUSIN SERIES," ETC. - - WITH ILLUSTRATIONS BY - SEARS GALLAGHER - - W. A. WILDE COMPANY - BOSTON CHICAGO - - - - - _Copyright_, 1905, - BY W. A. WILDE COMPANY. - _All rights reserved._ - - THE COMING OF THE WHITE MEN - - - - -PREFACE - - -The true American is happy in the thought that his country is a great -and glorious one. He can say with his heart as well as his lips, "This -is the land of the Free and the home of the Brave." - -Those who journey far from their native land and find themselves in -foreign countries tell us how they are stirred and thrilled when by -any chance the stars and stripes of the American flag meet their view. -These stars and stripes stand for the struggles for freedom, the brave -deeds in the cause of right and justice, the heroism of those who have -laid down their lives that their country should still live, and the -brother-love that binds together all the men, women, and children who -can say, "I am an American!" - -It is only right that the boys and girls of America, as soon as they -are able to understand, should hear the stories of those who took the -first steps toward the building of this nation—those who risked life -and fortune and who were willing to face unknown dangers for the sake -of freedom. - -If these boys and girls of America are to grow up with the earnest -desire of keeping the sacred trust that must descend to them; if they -are to keep this country the land of the free and the home of the -brave; if their aspirations and ideals shall be of the highest and the -purest, so that the powers and privileges of America shall increase -rather than diminish with the coming years, then let the plant of -patriotism take root early in their hearts that it may grow with their -growth and blossom in perfect fullness with their maturer years. - - - - -CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I. THE NORSEMEN 11 - - II. THE GENOESE SAILOR 29 - - III. JOHN CABOT AND THE CODFISH 49 - - IV. THE FOUNTAIN OF YOUTH 58 - - V. THE GOOD KNIGHT AND THE LOST BABY 64 - - VI. THE STORY OF A DARING MAN 75 - - VII. HENRY HUDSON 95 - - VIII. THE PILGRIMS 109 - - IX. LITTLE PILGRIMS OF LONG AGO 127 - - X. ROGER WILLIAMS 136 - - XI. THE FATHER OF WATERS 141 - - XII. THE STORY OF A YOUNG QUAKER 158 - - XIII. LORD BALTIMORE AND THE CATHOLICS 167 - - XIV. THE POOR DEBTORS 177 - - - - -ILLUSTRATIONS. - - - PAGE - - THE NORSEMEN _Frontispiece_ 18 - - COLUMBUS AND HIS FLAG-SHIP 36 - - THE ENGLISH TRADING WITH THE INDIANS 68 - - THE DUTCH CHILDREN AT PLAY 102 - - FUR-TRADING WITH THE FRENCH 142 - - - - -CHAPTER I - -THE NORSEMEN - - -His name wasn't Sam and he wasn't their real uncle, but everybody else -called him Uncle Sam, so Joe and Lucy followed their example. - -He was tall and thin and had a sharp face. A funny little tuft of -hair grew on his chin and when he was thinking deeply he was fond of -stroking this tuft with his big bony hand. - -His clothes always seemed to be old-fashioned. When the neighbors were -speaking of him they would sometimes say, "How much he looks like the -newspaper pictures of 'Uncle Sam.'" - -"Whenever I meet him, he somehow makes me think of America," said Joe's -father. "I never knew anyone who loved his country as dearly as he -does. He is perfectly happy whenever he can get anyone to listen to -stories of our great men and the things that happened here long ago." - -It was for these reasons that people began calling him Uncle Sam before -Joe and Lucy were born. - -His real name was Ebenezer Wilkins, but the children had to stop and -think before they could remember it. He lived in a cosy little cottage -at the end of the village and kept house there all alone from one -year's end to another. - -Everybody loved him. His kind blue eyes looked tenderly upon each child -in the place. If measles or chicken-pox shut a boy or girl away from -playmates, Uncle Sam was sure to hear of it. Then, when his day's work -was done and he had eaten his supper of bread and milk, he would visit -the sick child and make him forget his troubles as he told stories -of boys and girls who lived in the early days of the white people in -America. - -Joe and Lucy were twins. Somehow or other Uncle Sam had grown to love -them more than any other children in the country round. When they were -babies he used to dandle them on his knees. He taught them to take -their first steps alone. He bought a book of "Mother Goose's Melodies" -on purpose to learn the rhymes and afterwards repeat them to the -listening babies. - -Sometimes he even stayed home from church on Sunday mornings so as to -take care of these twins and give their father and mother a chance to -go away together. - -"Twins are a great care, a great care," he would say slowly. But he -would add with a twinkle in his eyes, "They are never too much of a -care for Uncle Sam." - -"He is better than any _real_ uncle in the world," said Joe, as he and -Lucy opened the gate leading into the old man's garden. - -It was a summer evening and the sun was just setting. The rows of -hollyhocks and marigolds looked prettier than ever in the sunset light. - -"Uncle Sam loves bright things," said Lucy, looking at the flowers. "He -is always finding something new to admire. That is why I like to walk -in the woods with him." - -"He shows me many things I should never see myself," answered Joe. - -By this time the children had reached the door of the house, and -stepped inside. They never stopped to knock; Uncle Sam would not have -liked it. - -"I've brought you some cookies, Uncle Sam," said Lucy, handing a -covered dish to the old man. "Mother made them this morning. She put -raisins in them because she knew you are fond of fruit cookies." - -Uncle Sam was pleased when he lifted the napkin and looked at his -present. - -"I can make bread and cook meat and potatoes, but cake is beyond my -skill. It takes women-folks to do such work." The old man laughed -softly as he put the cookies away in the cupboard. - -"It is a lovely evening. Won't you come out on the porch and tell us -stories in the twilight?" - -As Lucy spoke, she reached up and put her arms around Uncle Sam's neck. -He was so tall he had to bend down to let her do so. - -"I suppose you want me to tell you about Cinderella for the fiftieth -time, or maybe you would rather hear about Aladdin and his Wonderful -Lamp?" - -"No, Uncle Sam," said Joe before Lucy had a chance to answer. "We -are getting too big for fairy stories. We have just begun to study -geography at school. We like it better than anything we've ever had. -So Lucy and I have been talking it over. We said we would ask you to -tell us true stories now about America, and the Indians, and the brave -white people who first dared to come here, you know, and all such -things." - -Uncle Sam fairly beamed with delight. - -"I've been thinking of that very thing, children. I have been longing -for the time when you would like to hear some of the history of this -glorious country. You will like it, too. Why, it is better than any -fairy stories that ever were told." - -In five minutes more the old man was sitting in his big easy chair on -the porch. Lucy was perched on one of the broad arms of the chair, and -Joe on the other. - -"We are all ready, so please begin," said Lucy, coaxingly. - -"Very well. Shut your eyes for a minute so you cannot look at those -rows of hollyhocks in front of you. I want you to see a different -picture. You must take a peep at this country of ours before a white -man ever set foot on it." - -"All right; I am ready, for my eyes are shut tight," cried Joe with a -laugh. - -"Now, then. First you must notice the great forests that stretch over a -large part of the land. Wild beasts are roaming about in the darkness -of those woods. Wolves and foxes, bears and wildcats live a free and -happy life, for the sound of a gun has never yet been heard. - -"Turn your thoughts next to the great plains of the west. Thousands -of buffaloes are wandering about. The herds are so vast that in some -places the earth is fairly black with them. - -"Here and there, over the country, stand the villages of the Red Men. -They are usually built near the shores of streams or ponds so that -fresh water may be plentiful. - -"There are no stores, no factories, no churches, no roads, from one -shore of America to the other. - -"At first, it may seem strange to you that the Indians made no roads, -for they were traveling a good deal of the time. They moved their homes -whenever the game became scarce where they happened to be living. -Besides that, they delighted in war and one tribe was continually -taking some other one by surprise. - -"They did not, however, go about in the way white people do. They -journeyed on foot in single file and the narrow paths they trod through -the forests can be seen to this day. Some of those paths are hundreds -of years old. They are many miles in length. Such paths are called -trails. - -"I have traveled over one of the Indian trails. It was in the state of -New York. It made me feel queer as I thought of the painted Red Men who -so long ago made that path through the dark woods. - -"The clothing and houses of these people were quite different in the -different parts of this country. The games and festivals of one tribe -were often unlike those of any other. - -"Some Indians lived in tents covered with the skins of wild animals. -Others had houses of birch bark. Then again, there were tribes who -braided grasses into pretty mats with which they covered the framework -of their houses. - -"The food was also different. In the south, where the air is warm and -pleasant almost all the year, the Red Men ate a great deal of fruit. -Up here in the north they lived largely on the corn that the women -planted and tended, while out on the great plains they ate quantities -of buffalo meat." - -Lucy's eyes opened wider and wider as the old man talked. - -"I didn't need to close them at all," she said. "I can always see the -pictures you paint with words. You make them so bright, Uncle Sam." - -"Some other time, my dear, we will talk more about the Red Children, -but now we will turn to the first white men who visited America. - -"The first visitors from Europe were bold Norsemen. Their homes were -in the far north. There were many deep, narrow bays along the shores -of their own country and they loved the ocean from the time they -were born. While they were still children, they learned to sail over -its rough waves, and by the time they were young men they were quite -fearless. The worst storms and the fiercest winds did not make them -tremble. - -"From year to year they kept sailing farther and farther westward in -their queer boats." - -"Why were they queer, Uncle Sam?" asked Lucy. - -"They would seem queer to us because they had such high prows and -sterns and because large figures of dragons and other strange creatures -were often carved on the ends of the boats. The sails, too, were of a -different shape from any you ever saw. - -"But let me go on with my story. It happened one time that some -Vikings, as these brave Norse seamen were called, sailed so far into -the west that they came to an island they had never seen before. This -was Iceland. You have heard the name, haven't you, children?" - -"Yes, Uncle Sam." - -"Iceland lies about half-way between Europe and America, but it is much -farther north than we are. The Norsemen who came upon it by accident, -called it Snowland." - -"I think that is a pretty name. I wish it were called Snowland, now," -said Lucy, half to herself. - -"Yes, it is a pretty name," said Uncle Sam. Then he went on. - -"The one who first saw Iceland did not remain there. He went back to -Norway. Four years later, another Norseman was driven to the coast of -Iceland by a storm. Before he left it, he sailed all around its shores -and found it was an island. - -"When he got home again, he said it was such a pleasant place that -another daring Viking decided to go to Iceland to live. He carried -seeds for planting and cattle to furnish milk and meat. He stayed there -all one winter. It was so cold that the poor cattle died. - -"When spring came, the Norseman made ready to plant his seeds, but the -land was still covered with ice. 'This is not a fit place for anyone to -live,' he cried. He once more packed his goods on his ship and sailed -for Norway. - -"That, however, was not the end of the white men's life in Iceland. -Ten years after that another band of Norsemen went there and settled. -They lived in peace and comfort. Children were born and grew up in that -cold island of the north. They were carefully taught by their parents -and became wise men and women. This settlement in Iceland lasted for -hundreds of years. - -"You children may wonder why I tell you so much about the Norsemen -coming to Iceland, but it is like the first step of a ladder. Perhaps -you are getting tired, though, and do not wish to hear any more -to-night." - -"O no, we are not a bit tired, Uncle Sam," said both Lucy and her -brother. - -"Well, then, if Iceland was the first step toward America, Greenland -was the second one. - -"Some of the early settlers in Iceland were driven westward in a storm -while they were out sailing. It was then that they first saw the rocky -shores of Greenland. - -"A good many years after this there was a certain man living in Iceland -named Eric the Red. He did not get along very well with his neighbors -and had many quarrels with them. He said to himself: - -"'I will seek that land west of us and will make a home for myself -there.' - -"He sailed away from Iceland and was not heard of again for three -years. When he came back on a visit, he spoke of the place where he had -been living as 'Greenland.' He thought: - -"'If I give it a good name, others will like to go there and settle.'" - -"Now I know why it was called Greenland," said Lucy, laughing. -"Whenever we sing 'From Greenland's Icy Mountains,' I always wonder -about the name. I knew it must be a cold and icy land, because of the -words of the hymn." - -"Yes, that was the way of it. The name Greenland sounded very pleasant -to the people of Iceland and a large company of them went back with -Eric to settle among the icy mountains you sing about. - -"We come now to the third accident and the third step that brought the -Norsemen to our own land. - -"Eric the Red had sons. They were bold and daring sailors, like their -father. During the long winter evenings they used to listen to the -stories of the older people. There was one that they liked best of -all. It was the tale of a young man named Biarne who was trying to find -the way from Iceland to Greenland. His father had gone there with Eric, -and Biarne wished to follow him. - -"He started off in the right direction. When he had sailed out of sight -of land, a thick fog settled down. Then a north wind began to blow. Day -after day, the ship was driven by the strong north wind. Biarne could -do nothing but wonder, 'Where are we going? Surely, this wind will -never carry us to Greenland.' - -"At last the fog cleared away and not long after that the Norseman -and his crew found they were sailing near a shore on which trees were -growing. Low hills rose behind it. It could not be Greenland, truly, -for Biarne had been told that the hills there were high and that they -were covered with ice. - -"When Biarne refused to land, his men were quite angry. 'I must go on -with my search for my father,' he told them. 'I only care now to find -him.' - -"Again they set sail and after two more days they saw land again. It -was low and wooded, so Biarne knew that this could not be the country -he was seeking. - -"'I will not stop here,' he told his men. Of course they grumbled, but -they were obliged to do as he wished. - -"Three more days passed, and a land with high and snowy mountains came -into sight. - -"'I am sure this is not Greenland, either,' said Biarne, and he would -not stop. He sailed along its shores, however, long enough to find it -was an island. - -"In three days from that time, he reached the shores of Greenland. When -Biarne at last cast anchor he was very near that part of the country -where his father was living. - -"Whenever Eric's sons heard this story of Biarne, they thought, 'When -we grow up, we will go to sea. Then we will try to find the country -with green hills and many trees. Who knows what else we shall see in -such a pleasant land?" - -"The time came at last when the eldest son of Eric was old enough to -start on a long voyage. It was in the year 1000. Biarne went with him. - -"The first shore that met their eyes was Newfoundland. They landed and -found it was a plain covered with stones. They returned to the ships -and soon Nova Scotia came in sight. - -"After they had looked over that land, they started once more and -sailed southward. They came to our own New England. I believe they were -not a hundred miles away from where we are this very minute. - -"They were much pleased with the place. They found plenty of large -salmon in the waters. Trees grew everywhere about them. The air was -much warmer and pleasanter than in Greenland. - -"There was one thing which delighted them more than anything else. They -found vines with great bunches of grapes growing upon them. This is how -it happened. One night one of their party was missing. He had gone with -a few men to look around and see what they could discover. This man was -a German and his name was Tyrker. His friends came back without him. He -had wandered away from them. They believed he was lost. - -"Everyone felt bad. They thought they should never see him again. Some -of them went to hunt for the missing man. They had not gone far when -they met him. He seemed wild with joy. He could hardly speak, he was so -glad. At first, his friends thought he had lost his mind. - -"After a while he was able to say that he had found vines with grapes -upon them. He knew what they were, for he had seen grapes growing in -his own country of Germany. - -"It seemed too good to be true. They all knew that the wine they liked -so well was made from grapes. They followed Tyrker and found the vines -he had described. - -"What a treasure they had discovered! Stores of grapes were gathered -day after day and carried on board the ship. Trees were also cut down, -for the people in Greenland would be glad to have all the lumber their -friends could bring them. - -"The Vikings said, 'We will call this place Vinland because of the -grape vines we have found.' - -"As soon as the ship had been loaded with all it could carry, the -joyful party left our shores and turned northward once more. During -their short visit here they saw no other people. - -"When they reached home they told such bright stories of their visit -that others wished to go to Vinland. - -"Another party of Norsemen soon started. When they got here, they met -some people who must have been Eskimos. These savages were quite short -and had broad faces. They had skin boats such as the Eskimos use to -this day." - -"I never heard of Eskimos around here!" said Joe in surprise. - -"I don't know how to explain it except in this way," replied Uncle Sam. -"In those days the Eskimos, or some of them, must have lived along -these shores, for the Norsemen certainly found them here. The Indians -may have driven them away afterwards. We can only guess about it. - -"The last Norsemen who came here did not stay long. Many things -happened to prevent it. I will tell you of one of these, because it is -really funny. - -"A bull which the Norsemen had brought among their cattle rushed out -of the woods one day. It frightened some Eskimos who had come to trade -with the white men. They managed to reach their boats and paddled away -as fast as they could go. They thought the bull was some dreadful -creature the Norsemen would use against them in war. - -"They went away, as I said, but they returned with great numbers of -their own people. The Vikings said that they were now like a rushing -torrent. They came to fight and to drive the white men from their -shores. - -"It would have been a sad day for the Norsemen if it had not been for -one brave woman. They were fleeing from the Eskimos when she rushed out -and faced the savages. She did not try to attack them, but began to -strike at herself with a sword. They were so startled that they turned -and fled to their boats. - -"This was only one of the many adventures the Vikings had in Vinland. -They had so many troubles that after a few years they made up their -minds to remain in Greenland." - -"How do you know all these things are true, Uncle Sam? Did the Norse -people write books about them?" - -"Those are good questions, Joe. The Norsemen did not write any history -of themselves at that time. They did not know how to write. They were -great story-tellers, however, and during the long winter evenings they -used to tell, over and over again, the things that had happened to -them. They made songs about their adventures. Their children learned -these songs and when they grew up they taught them to their children. -Hundreds of years afterwards Roman priests came among them and told -them of the Christian God. At the same time the priests taught them -to read and write. They now began to write down the history of their -people. - -"But, dear me, children, I have been so busy talking I never thought -how late it is growing. There is your father at the gate. He must be -coming for you." - -"Thank you, Uncle Sam," said Lucy, as she kissed the old man -good-night, "I enjoyed what you told us ever so much." - -"I am glad you started with the Norsemen," said Joe. "I always like to -hear the first part of anything. So, of course, as you are going to tell -us the story of America, we ought to know the very beginning of it." - -"My dear boy," said Uncle Sam, "no one knows the real beginning. All -I could do was to start with the coming of the white men to this -country." - - - - -CHAPTER II - -THE GENOESE SAILOR - - -"Here we are, Uncle Sam. We came early so there would be time for a -good long story." - -The old man sat reading his newspaper in the soft light of the setting -sun. He looked up with a pleasant smile to greet the twins as they came -arm in arm down the path. - -"So you did not get too tired last night, Joe?" he replied. "I didn't -know but that you would beg me to go back to fairy stories and leave -true ones till you get older." - -"Fairy stories indeed!" exclaimed the boy with a look of scorn. "Lucy -and I both want to hear about real people. Don't we Lucy?" - -"Of course; we said so last night, and we think so more than ever now. -Have you made up your mind what to tell us next, Uncle Sam? But perhaps -you want to finish your newspaper." - -"Newspapers can wait till little folk are asleep in their beds, my -darlings. Besides, I have a story all ready and waiting. It is knocking -at the door of my mind this very moment and saying, 'Please let me out, -please let me out.' So out it must come. There, Joe, stretch yourself -comfortably in that hammock; and Lucy, take the steamer chair and draw -it up close by my side. Now I hope you are both ready for a visit to -another part of the world. - -"We won't take any trunks, and there will be no sea-sickness, nor -trouble of any kind. So let us start at once on a voyage across the -Atlantic Ocean. - -"Whew! Here we are safe and sound on the shores of Italy. The waves are -rolling gently and the air is sweet and pleasant. - -"A dark-skinned boy is sitting on the edge of the wharf and looking out -to sea. He is watching the ships coming into port. He can see a tiny -speck in the distance but he knows it is the top of some mast. As he -watches it a sail comes into view under it. It comes nearer and nearer -until the whole of a ship can be seen. - -"The name of the boy who sat looking out to sea was Christopher Columbus. - -"He loved the sea better than anything else. He longed to live on it -and make long voyages. He did not know what it was to be afraid. - -"As he grew up, he read all he could about the earth. He found that -some wise men believed it was not flat, as many supposed, but was -round. They also thought it much smaller than it really is. - -"The young Columbus said to himself: 'If the world is really round, -we can reach India by sailing west, instead of making such a long and -tiresome journey to the east." - -"Why did he care so much about getting to India?" asked Lucy. - -"The people of Europe thought India was the richest land in the world. -It had great stores of gold and silver. Beautiful silks and satins, -wonderful pearls and emeralds, fragrant spices,—all these things were -brought from that glorious land. It is no wonder that Columbus, as well -as everyone else, was interested in such a rich country. - -"There was another reason, however, why Columbus thought so much about -India and wished to find a shorter way of reaching it. He loved the -Lord with all his heart. He had been told that the people of the East -were heathens and that they worshiped idols. - -"He thought: 'I would like to tell these people of the One God and of -Jesus, the Friend of all men.' - -"I believe he cared more about that than for the silks and spices. - -"As soon as Columbus was old enough, he went to sea with some of his -relations. He learned how to steer a ship and how to manage it in -storms. He proved himself brave and daring in sea-fights. He studied -the winds and tides. - -"The time came at last when he spoke to the people of his own town in -Italy. He told them he believed he could find India by sailing to the -west. They did not listen to him. He himself could not fit up ships -to make a long voyage, for he had no money. So he could not try his -experiment. - -"Years passed by and Columbus went to Portugal. He still had one great -desire in his heart. You know what that was. - -"He lost no time in speaking to the King of Portugal. The king listened -to the plan. He thought it was a wise one. But he did not offer to send -Columbus on a voyage of discovery. O, no! He preferred to send some of -his own sailors. If the plan succeeded, he thought he would gain more -by so doing. - -"He sent the Italian away. Then he took the maps and charts Columbus -had made and showed them to the wisest men of the country. He thought: -'I will make use of what Columbus knows, but he shall get no reward.' - -"He was not honest. That is what I think. Don't you agree with me?" - -"Of course we do," both children exclaimed. - -"Some ships were fitted out and sailed into the west. They had not gone -far, however, before the sailors became afraid and turned back. The -king of Portugal did not try again." - -"I am glad he didn't," said Lucy. - -"It served him right," cried Joe. - -"We must not leave Columbus," Uncle Sam went on. "The brave sailor -left Portugal, but he was not discouraged. He kept thinking, thinking -where he should try next. After a while, he thought of Spain. He knew -that country was eager for wealth and new lands. He would go there. He -started for the Spanish court. His little son went with him. - -"The journey through the country was very tiresome. They went slowly, -for the roads were rough. The little boy sat in front of his father on -the horse's back. - -"At last, one evening, they stopped to rest at a convent. Columbus told -the good monks of the plan that was so dear to him. He showed them his -charts of the world. - -"They were much interested. They said: 'Our king and queen must see -your charts. We believe they will give you the money to fit out the -ships that you need. It will be a great thing for our country if you -find a short way to India.' - -"Columbus felt happy when he heard the monks' words. He left his little -son in their care and went on his way to the court of Ferdinand and -Isabella. - -"The king and queen listened kindly, but they could see no way of -giving money to Columbus. A war was going on at this very time and they -needed all their money to carry it on. - -"Columbus stayed in Spain for seven long years. He tried to get some of -the rich men of the country to listen to his plans and furnish money. -It was all in vain. - -"At last, just as he was leaving the country, some messengers came to -him. They said: 'Queen Isabella wishes to talk with you once more. She -would like to help you.' - -"How gladly Columbus turned back! He found the queen had such faith -in him that she was even willing to sell her beautiful jewels, if -necessary, for the sake of giving him money. - -"He set to work at once to get a fleet ready. Three ships were chosen. -Their bows and sterns were built high up out of the water. They were -very different from the ships of to-day. Provisions to last a whole -year were stowed away in them. - -"It was not as easy to find sailors as it was to get the ships." - -"I don't see why," interrupted Joe. "I should think there would have -been plenty of men eager to go." - -"Not so, my lad," replied Uncle Sam. "Only the boldest men would dare -to sail far into the west at that time. The people of those days were -full of queer fancies. They thought they would come to enchanted -islands and great dragons and all sorts of fearful things if they went -far away from home. - -"At last, however, enough sailors promised to go and the great day came -for the ships to set sail. How excited everyone was! Would these men -ever come back to the shores of Spain? Would they really find India, or -was it only the dream of a very bold man? - -"The wharves were covered with people who had gathered to see the ships -start on their daring voyage. - -"They sailed farther and farther into the west; now the lower parts -could be but dimly seen; then only the tops of the masts; then they -faded altogether from sight. - -"Now let us leave the onlookers of the shores and join the brave -Columbus on the deck of the Santa Maria, his flag-ship. - -"Day after day he guided the ships onward and ever westward. After they -had passed the Canary Islands, the men were always on the watch for -signs of some new land. After days, and then weeks, on the great ocean -the sailors became afraid. They begged their leader to turn back, but -they begged in vain. He would not listen. - -"At first he tried to keep up their courage by telling them of the -riches they would gain, or the honors their church would give them if -they carried the teachings of Christ to the heathens. When such words -lost their power Columbus became stern. He told the men how angry the -king would be if they did not obey their captain. - -[Illustration: COLUMBUS AND HIS FLAG-SHIP] - -"The time came when they began to plot against Columbus. They said: -'We will destroy him. Then, when we get home, we will say that he fell -overboard.' - -"Could they ever reach home, now they were so far away? The men became -afraid of what might happen to them if Columbus were dead and no one -left to pilot them home again. So they did not kill him. - -"He knew they did not feel kindly to him and he thought it would be -best to make some bargain with them. So he said: 'If we do not see land -in a certain number of days I will promise to turn back toward Spain.' - -"How eagerly he now watched from the deck of his vessel! It seemed -as though his hopes and beliefs would not prove true. The last day -came,—the day on which he had promised to turn back if they found no -signs of land. - -"Lo! a stick carved by some person's hand came floating along by the -ship's side. This was not all, for a branch with berries on it was -picked up out of the water. Land must be near! - -"'I will give a large reward to the man who first sees it,' cried -Columbus. As he watched that very night he saw a light in the -distance. It moved. He called two of his men to look at it. - -"Their hearts leaped for joy at the sight. - -"Before morning came, a sailor saw the shore in the distance by the -light of the moon. - -"Children," said Uncle Sam solemnly, "never forget that it was the 12th -of October of the year 1492 that Columbus first stepped upon the shores -of the New World. He was dressed in a full suit of steel armor and he -held the royal banner of Spain as he landed on the island which he named -San Salvador. - -"He planted the cross of the Christians and, with his officers and men -around him, knelt down to thank God for His great goodness in bringing -them so far in safety. - -"'How beautiful, how beautiful!' Columbus exclaimed as he looked about -him. Tall palm trees were moving gently in the warm breeze; strange and -lovely flowers were growing all around; birds of bright colors flew -overhead. - -"But these were not the only things to fill the brave sailor with -wonder. He and his men were soon surrounded by strange-looking people. -They had straight black hair and dark red skins. They wore little or no -clothing. - -"'This is India, without a doubt,' said Columbus, 'and these people are -Indians.' - -"He noticed the gold ornaments in their ears and he thought with -delight of the treasures he would carry back to Spain to good Queen -Isabella. - -"The Red Men were as much surprised as the Spaniards. They whispered to -each other, 'These white beings must be gods come from the heavens to -visit us.' - -"Then they pointed to the ships and said, 'The great birds that have -brought them to us are now floating on the water.' - -"The Indians wished to show honor to their visitors. They hurried to -their simple homes and gathered grains and fruits. They brought them as -presents to the Spaniards. - -"The white men were glad to receive the corn, cotton, and fruits. They -feasted on the delicious cocoanuts and bananas, yet they were not -satisfied. Gold was what they most wanted. When they asked the Indians -where to find it, the savages pointed towards the south." - -"I am glad Columbus wasn't a Spaniard," said Joe, who had kept still a -long time for a lively boy. "I just hate the Spaniards. I believe all -they care for is riches. It's a good thing we beat them in the last war." - -"My dear child," replied Uncle Sam, "You should hate no one. We may -thank the Spaniards for one thing at least. If it had not been for -them, Columbus might never have been able to cross the ocean and -discover America. You must remember they gave him the ships and money -he needed." - -"It was the good Queen Isabella," said Joe, "and she didn't seem at all -like the rest of her people. But please excuse me for interrupting you, -Uncle Sam." - -"That is all right, Joe. It shows you are a good listener. Now we will -go back to Columbus resting among the palm trees. - -"I am sure you children would have loved him. He had bright, keen eyes, -yet they were kind and loving; and he moved about with the air of a -king." - -"He had the right to do so," said Lucy, thoughtfully. "He couldn't help -feeling how great he was." - -"You are quite right," answered Uncle Sam, as he patted the little -girl's head. "Even the steps of a brave man must be different from -those of a coward. The bravery gets into them without the man's -thinking about it. - -"But dear me! It is getting late, and I am only half through my story. -We have turned our backs on Columbus and left him alone with the Red -Men quite as long as is polite. He enjoyed himself very much with them, -however, and stayed several days on the island. - -"Then he took to his ships once more and sailed about among the -different islands which he called the Indies. He thought that the right -name for them, as he still believed he was near the mainland of India. - -"Each time they landed, his men kept asking the natives where gold -could be found. Each time they were disappointed. But Columbus thought -it must be near at hand. He never dreamed that he was still far from -the land of spices and precious stones. - -"At the end of twelve weeks he said, 'We ought to go back to Spain and -tell what we have discovered.' - -"He gathered stores of the strange fruits and grains and rich woods -and packed them safely away in the ships. He also took some of the -brightly-feathered birds. - -"He left a part of the sailors on one of the islands. They were to make -a settlement. Then they would have a home ready for Columbus when he -should come again with more of their people. - -"When he had chosen some of the Indians to go back with him, all was -ready and he began to cross the great ocean once more." - -"He must have been almost bursting with pride and joy," cried Joe. "And -the voyage home must have seemed long, because he had so much to tell." - -"It came to an end at last, although there were terrible storms and the -ships came very near being wrecked," Uncle Sam went on. "At length, -however, they reached Spain. - -"The news of their return spread quickly. As soon as Columbus landed -crowds gathered to hear about his voyage and the whole country was -filled with joy. - -"When Columbus went to court to tell his story to the king and queen -they would not let him stand before them. 'He is too great a man,' they -thought. 'He has gained the right to sit in our presence.'" - -"O, my!" said Joe, "I thought everybody had to stand before kings and -queens." - -"Columbus wasn't a king, but he was certainly as great, only in -another way. Ferdinand was quite right in thinking so. He and his good -wife listened with delight to the story of the greatest voyage any man -ever made. - -"They believed as Columbus did that a short way to India had been -found. They eagerly examined the curious things brought to them from -the west. They ate of the delicious fruits and admired the bright birds -and beautiful woods. - -"They said: 'We will have a grand procession through the streets of -our city. Columbus shall wear beautiful garments and shall ride in the -midst.' - -"The Indians, bright with paint and feathers, went first of all in the -procession. Crowds of people lined the streets to see the Red Men, the -curious fruits and flowers, the parrots, and the stuffed bodies of -animals they had never heard of before. - -"They wished, most of all, to look upon the great man who had dared to -sail so far into the west and who had brought India with all its riches -to Spain. For everyone believed this was what Columbus had done. - -"Many entertainments were prepared for the great sailor. Nearly -everyone wished to give him honor. A few, however, were jealous. - -"One day while Columbus was at a dinner party given in his honor one of -the king's courtiers said: - -"'It was not a hard thing to do what this Italian has done. Anyone else -might have done the same thing.' - -"Of course the man said this because he was jealous and did not like to -see so much attention given to a poor sailor from Italy. - -"Columbus did not seem troubled at this man's words. He took an egg -from the table and handed it to the speaker. Then he said: - -"'Can you make that egg stand on end?' - -"The man tried, but could not do it. It was passed from one person to -another. Everyone failed. At last it came back to Columbus. He took it -in his hand and struck it gently on the table so that the shell was -slightly cracked. Then, taking away his hand, he left it standing on end. - -"'It is easy enough for anyone to do that,' cried the courtier. - -"'It is also easy for anyone to find the Indies after I have shown the -way,' was the reply of Columbus. - -"Not long after this the great man made ready for another voyage across -the ocean. - -"How different everything was now! There was no trouble now to find -sailors willing to go with him. Indeed, it was almost too easy. -Everyone was anxious to visit the Indies. They believed it was the -quickest way to gain riches and comfort. - -"When the second fleet was ready to sail there were seventeen ships and -fifteen hundred men. Only think of it! It was almost like a traveling -city. - -"They had no trouble in crossing the ocean, but when they came to the -island where Columbus had before left a part of his men, there was no -sign of them nor of the homes they had made. - -"'This time I will choose a different place to settle,' said Columbus. - -"He sailed into a fine harbor about forty miles away. The men landed -and began to build the first city of the New World for white people to -live in. They called it Isabella after the good queen of Spain. - -"Columbus spent some time as governor of the settlement. Then he went -back to Spain with news of the white men's city in the west. He did not -stay long, however. He was soon restless for a third voyage across the -great ocean. - -"He sailed farther to the southward than he had before. For the first -time he saw the shores of South America. Then he went back to the -settlement in the West Indies, but the people were not glad to see him." - -Uncle Sam stopped for a moment and looked quite sad. - -"Children," he said, "I must tell the truth and say that Columbus was -not as good a governor as he was a sailor. It would have been hard work -for anyone to rule his people, for they had to work hard and they were -not satisfied because gold was not plentiful. - -"'It is not what we expected,' they cried angrily. 'We thought you -would bring us to a land filled with gold and diamonds.' - -"Some of them even whispered among themselves, 'Columbus is not what he -pretends to be. He has cheated us badly.' - -"At last they declared they would not let him stay there any longer. -They put chains upon him and sent him back to Spain." - -Uncle Sam took a picture from the table drawer. - -"Look at Columbus now," said the old man. "There he sits on the deck of -the ship with heavy chains bound on his arms like one who has done a -great wrong. Yet he gave a whole continent to the people who put them -on him. - -"'I will take off your chains,' said the kind-hearted captain of the -ship. It is a shame for you to wear them.' - -"'No, no. Let them remain,' answered Columbus. I will wear them as a -token of the kindness of princes.' - -"How different was his third landing in Spain! This time there were no -crowds waiting to show him honor. He was carried before the queen, who -wept in pity at the sight of her old friend in chains. The brave man -now broke down. As he tried to tell his story his words were choked -with sobs. - -"Isabella did not desert him, however. She helped him to fit out -another fleet and he started on his last voyage. He sailed among other -islands of the West Indies and returned to Spain after a great deal of -suffering. He was sick and poor. There were many who once could not do -too much for him but who now mocked him. - -"He died with the belief that he had found a short way to India. He had -no thought of what he had really discovered. It is a shame he did not -get the honor he deserved." - -Uncle Sam rose suddenly from his arm chair and began to walk up and -down the room. "Yes, it is a shame. A burning shame. Children, let us -sing 'Columbia, the Gem of the Ocean.'" - -The old man turned to the little organ at one side of the room. In -a moment the house was filled with the voices of Uncle Sam and his -two young friends. When the song was over, the children kissed him -good-night and started for home. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -JOHN CABOT AND THE CODFISH - - -That same night after the children had gone to bed Lucy was just -falling asleep when Joe called out: - -"I say, Lucy, I wonder why our country isn't always called Columbia -instead of America." - -"Do keep still, Joe. I was so nice and sleepy and now you have waked me -up," answered his sister. "You can ask Uncle Sam the next time you see -him." - -Two or three evenings afterward the old man was on his knees weeding -his pansy bed when he heard steps near by. - -"Uncle Sam! Uncle Sam! where are you?" called a girl's voice. - -"Here I am, my little pink of a Lucy," and he straightened himself up -by the side of the apple tree around which the pansies were growing. - -"That is a lovely place for them. They don't have too much sunshine. -How large the blossoms are! May I have that big purple one? It looks -at me like a loving face." - -"Of course you may, Lucy. But where is Joe?" - -"He has gone on an errand for mother. After that, he's coming here. -But we can't stay very long this evening. Mother said we must go to -bed early to-night so as to be fresh for the picnic to-morrow. You are -going, aren't you, Uncle Sam?" - -"Certainly I am. I wouldn't miss it for the world." - -"I'm so glad. Mother said I must be sure to tell you not to take any -lunch. We shall carry enough for you. It is a lovely lunch. Roast -chicken and nut cake and apple jelly. I can hardly wait for to-morrow. -Now aren't you glad you are going?" - -"It makes me hungry to think of it, so you and I will have to eat some -cherries I picked this afternoon." - -"Aren't they beauties! How juicy they are. Red cherries are prettier, -but I think I like these blackhearts the best. Here comes Joe now." - -"You are just in time," called Uncle Sam, as Joe came hurrying along. - -"Cherries are ripe, cherries are ripe," sang Lucy, as her brother sat -down on the steps, quite out of breath. - -"Christopher!" exclaimed Joe as soon as he could speak. "I've had an -awful long walk and I'm as tired as anything." - -"You shouldn't say 'Christopher,' nor 'awful,' either, Joe. They are as -bad as slang." - -"You needn't preach, Lucy. I should like to know a better word -than 'Christopher' in the whole language. Wasn't Columbus's name -Christopher?" - -"I know that. It is all the more reason for not making the word so -common. He was too great a man. But, Uncle Sam, that makes me think of -what Joe was saying the other night. He and I both think Columbia is a -better name for our country than America." - -"Let us see about that, children. I must tell you how it all happened. - -"You remember, of course, that Columbus never knew what he had -discovered. He thought he had visited the shores of Asia. Some years -after his first great voyage another man from his own country of Italy -sailed out into the west. His name was Americus Vespucius. A little -hard to say, isn't it? - -"He was a merchant who had made several long voyages already. He -went farther south than Columbus and sailed along the shores of South -America. - -"'It is a vast country,' he said to himself, and he was the first one -to call it the 'New World.' He wrote long letters telling of what -he had seen. The man who printed these letters called the New World -America in his honor. And it has been called America ever since. But I -like Columbia best myself, children. The name is very dear to me." - -While Joe and Lucy finished eating the cherries, Uncle Sam sat thinking. - -"What shall I next tell them about our glorious land?" he said to -himself. "Oh, now I know. I am sure they would like to hear about John -Cabot and the codfish. It isn't a very long story and there is just -time enough before they should go home." - -The twins were quite willing to listen. They had already found that -true stories were quite as interesting as make-believe ones. - -As they sat on the steps in the twilight this is what they heard: - -Once upon a time there was a little boy who lived in Italy. It was -about the time that Columbus lived there, too. The boy's name was John -Cabot. He loved the sea as Columbus did. He liked to listen to stories -of strange lands. - -When he grew up he was not satisfied to stay at home. He began to -travel and made longer and longer journeys. After a while he went to -England and made his home in that country. He did not stay there, -however, for he wished to learn all he could about the world. - -On one of his journeys he traveled to Arabia. He met some men there who -were leading camels loaded with spices. People used a great deal of -spice in their food and drink, so it was very precious to them. - -John Cabot began to talk with the men. He asked them where they got all -those spices. They pointed still farther to the east and explained to -him that it was a long, long way off. - -He thought a good deal about what the men told him. He said to himself: - -"If I should go west far enough I should surely come to the east. The -wise men must be right when they tell us the earth is round." - -After he went back to England he heard the great news from Spain. A -man named Columbus had done just what Cabot thought possible. He had -reached the east by sailing west. - -"It is truly wonderful," said the people. It was the talk of the whole -country. John Cabot was as much excited as everyone else. He asked the -king of England to send him on a voyage to the newly-found country. The -king thought: - -"The Spaniards should not be the only ones to bring back the riches of -India. We must have a share of their good fortune." - -He was quite willing, therefore, to send John Cabot, who was a wise man -and a good sailor. Cabot's son went with him on the voyage. - -They came to the mainland of North America, but they were much farther -north than Columbus had ever been. It was quite cold and the place -looked bare and lonesome. - -They saw no Indians, but there were some fishnets lying about near the -shore. These nets being there showed that probably people were not far -away. - -"What great numbers of fish there are in these waters," exclaimed -Cabot. "I never in my life before saw so many. 'The Land of the -Codfish' is a good name for this country." - -He did not stay long, for food was becoming scarce. So the ship soon -started on the homeward voyage. When they reached England the sailors -told wonderful stories about the "Land of the Codfish." They said: - -"The waters were so thick with fish that the ship sometimes could not -move as fast as it otherwise would. One thing amused us very much. It -was the strange sight of bears fishing! The great creatures swam out -into the water and caught the fish in their paws. Sometimes the fish -were so large that they fought hard to get away, but the bears nearly -always won the battle." - -John Cabot told the king he had discovered the country of China. He was -treated with the highest honor and called "The Great Admiral." He was -dressed in rich silks. The king promised he should have a sum of money -given him every year for the rest of his life. - -After a while the king began to say to himself: - -"It is all very well to make a voyage to the west and find the east, -but that is not enough. I should like some of the gold and gems and -delicious spices found there." - -So it came about that John Cabot and his son started out on a second -voyage. When they reached North America this time they sailed along -its shores for a long distance. They saw Indians dressed in skins and -wearing ornaments of copper. But they found no gold nor spices. - -Cabot still thought he had visited Asia. The king of England did not -care about him any longer, however. He was of no use if he could not -bring to England the treasures of India. This is probably the reason we -know nothing more about John Cabot. - -We do not even know how long he lived nor when he died. His son -Sebastian lived to be a bright and lively old man and was always glad -to hear of the voyages of others to far-away places. - -When Uncle Sam had finished the story of John Cabot he told the -children why he wished them to remember it. - -"Columbus made his voyages with the help of Spain," said he. "That -country claimed the right to hold the lands he discovered. That is why -the people who settled in the West Indies and in almost all of South -America came from Spain and spoke the Spanish language. - -"But John Cabot sailed for the English king and that is why the English -said: - -"'We claim the eastern part of North America.' - -"Years after the time of John Cabot they sent people to settle here. -They spoke our language and planted English ways and English thoughts -with their corn and potatoes." - -Uncle Sam laughed as he added, "Maybe you and I would have been -Spaniards if it had not been for John Cabot. I wonder how you would -have liked that, Joe. I know you are not too fond of your Spanish -cousins." - -"Cousins! Ugh! I don't like to think of their being relations of mine." - -"My dear boy, this world isn't so very large after all, and one great -Father loves us and cares for all. Of course, we think America could -teach Spain one or two things, but I don't doubt she could help us in -some ways, too. No one is perfect, Joe, or else we shouldn't need to -live in this world. Come, children, give me a kiss and run off to your -little beds." - -"Good-night, sleep tight, and don't let the mosquitos bite," Lucy -called to her old friend as she followed Joe down the path. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -THE FOUNTAIN OF YOUTH - - -A finer day could not have been chosen for the picnic. When the -party started for the pine grove four miles from home there were six -carriages full of people. It was a lovely place for a picnic party and -Joe and Lucy played hard all day with their little friends. Six o'clock -came all too soon. - -"Please stay a little longer and eat the rest of our lunch for supper," -begged the children. The older people were quite willing. - -"It is a good thing we can get plenty of good water from that spring," -said Lucy's father. "It is nearly as cold as ice water and certainly as -cold as anyone ever ought to drink. I should like to come here every -day for the sake of a drink of it." - -"I love to hear the water as it makes its way down over the rocks. They -say the spring never dries up, even in the hottest days of summer," -said Uncle Sam, who was standing near. - -"Uncle Sam! A story, a story!" cried some one, as they settled -themselves on the grass to eat chicken sandwiches and apple turnovers. - -"That spring makes me think of something you might like to hear. It is -true, though it is nearly as strange as a fairy story. I suppose the -older ones all know it." - -"Do tell it, Uncle Sam," cried the children, and their parents seemed -as willing to listen as the little ones. - -As the evening clouds changed from silver to gold and crimson, and the -young moon peeped shyly out in the evening sky, Uncle Sam told the -story of - - -THE FOUNTAIN OF EVERLASTING YOUTH - -A long time ago there was a young knight in Spain named Ponce de Leon. -He was gay and handsome, fond of dress and of good times. Columbus had -made his voyages to America and come back to Spain to die. - -The men whom he had left in the West Indies needed a governor. The king -looked around his court. At last he chose Ponce de Leon as the best man -to send to the New World. The knight was quite willing, so he went to -live in the island of Porto Rico, one of the West Indies. - -His life was an easy one. He did very little himself but was a cruel -master over the poor Indians who had to work hard at his bidding. -Before the white men came among them they had easy times, swinging in -their hammocks, bathing in the clear waters, and eating the wild fruits -which were so plentiful. - -Everything was changed after the arrival of the cruel Spaniards. - -"These white men are great and wise," the Indians had thought at first. -"We must serve them and give them all we can. They wish gold. We will -show them where they can find it in the earth and the beds of the -rivers." - -These poor savages of Porto Rico were gentle creatures. They knew -little about war. When they found the Spaniards had no love for them -and cared for nothing except gold, it was too late to save themselves. -They were forced to wait upon their white masters. They had to work -in the gold mines as they had never worked before. They missed the -pleasant sunlight. They became weak and sick. Great numbers of them died. - -All this time Ponce de Leon was storing away great piles of the gold -the Indians brought him. He made a poor governor. The king of Spain at -last sent word he should no longer rule over the island of Porto Rico. - -He was now growing old. He had been sick many times. He began to think -of what the Indians had told him. They said: - -"Much gold can be found in the land north of us. Something better than -gold can also be found there. It is a wonderful fountain. If anyone -tastes of its waters he shall never be sick again but shall be young -forever." - -The heart of the Spaniard leaped for joy. "That is what I want," he -said. "Such a fountain is indeed better than all the gold in the world." - -He might very easily say this, for he already had all the gold he -needed. - -He started out with a gay company of his friends. They sailed about -among the islands, stopping here and there to feast and make merry. - -Still they sailed on toward the north till at last they came in sight -of a land beautiful with flowers. It was a glorious Easter Sunday. The -air was sweet with delicious odors. - -"I will call this place Florida," said Ponce de Leon, "because it is -the Flowery Easter." - -He and his men spent some time wandering about through the country, -always looking for the wonderful fountain. - -"It may be here," he would think as he picked his way through a forest. - -"Listen!" one of his friends would cry as he heard the sound of running -water and thought it might be the Fountain of Youth they were seeking. - -They were disappointed again and again. At last they went back to -the ships and sailed for Spain. They had found plenty of fruits and -flowers. They had met many Indians, some of whom were friendly and -gentle, but others were fierce and warlike. Their eager eyes never -beheld the Fountain of Youth. - -Ponce de Leon did not give up his hope of finding it, however. He told -the king of Spain of the beautiful country of Florida and that he hoped -to find gold there. The king said: - -"You may be the governor of this new land if you will take others with -you and settle there." - -The old man went back to Florida. Alas! he only went to pain and -trouble. As he was about to land, a party of Indians came out to meet -him. They were not willing to let the white men come on shore. A fight -took place. Ponce de Leon was shot. A poisoned arrow entered his body -and made a frightful wound. He went back to the ship and set sail for -Cuba. His wound did not heal, for the poison from the arrow was still -working. - -He never again tried to find the Fountain of Youth, for he died in a -few days. - -"Nobody else ever found it, either," said Uncle Sam as he finished the -story. - -"People used to have such silly notions," said one of the party, as -they packed up to go home. - -"The more they traveled, the wiser they became," replied Uncle Sam. -"There is nothing like travel to make our minds grow. Some time I may -go round the world myself. I'm not too old yet." - -"I hope you will let Joe and me go with you," said Lucy, as she took -hold of his hand and pointed to the waiting carriage. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -THE GOOD KNIGHT AND THE LOST BABY - - -Joe and Lucy were sitting on Uncle Sam's steps. They were busy making -daisy wreaths. - -"We will put a double crown on Uncle Sam's head," Lucy whispered. "Then -we will play he is the king of Spain sending Ponce de Leon to Florida." - -The old man heard her. "I shall look quite royal with such a grand -crown," he said with a laugh. "But to-night you had better pretend I am -England's good Queen Bess. She lived long after John Cabot. Let me see! -It was about seventy-five years from then to the time Walter Raleigh -first met her." - -"There! I've finished my wreath, so please let me put it on your head. -Then I'll be very still while you talk to us," said Lucy. - -"Mine is done, too," cried Joe. - -"Oh, Uncle Sam, you look just lovely," exclaimed the little girl, -standing up to admire her friend. - -Then she and Joe settled themselves at his feet to hear the story of -Queen Elizabeth and her brave knight: - -A long time ago there was a little boy in England named Walter Raleigh. -He was a very beautiful child and as brave as he was handsome. - -While he was still very young he left his quiet home in the country and -went to war in other lands. In a few years he came back to England. -Now, however, he was a tall, strong man, as brave and handsome as ever. - -One afternoon he dressed himself in rich and beautiful clothes and went -out to walk. He wore a white satin vest, a brown doublet embroidered -with pearls, yellow shoes tied with white satin ribbons and sparkling -with precious stones, and a wide hat trimmed with a long black plume. -His dark hair fell in curls over his shoulders. He was a grand sight, -indeed. - -He had not walked far when lo! he saw Queen Elizabeth coming that way. -The ladies of her court were with her. Suddenly the queen stopped. A -pool of muddy water stood in her pathway, for a shower had fallen only -a short time before. - -What should she do? The queen stopped to think how she could keep from -wetting her dainty shoes. - -No sooner had she done this than Walter Raleigh stepped forward, threw -off his rich cloak, and spread it over the pool. A dry way was thus -made for the queen to pass over. - -She turned to the young man and, thanking him, gave him a sweet smile. -Then she went on her way, but she did not forget him. She asked her -ladies his name. When he afterwards appeared at court she was ready to -show him kindness. - -She found that Walter Raleigh was not only a true gentleman, but that -he was also brave and wise. - -He went to sea in the queen's ships and showed that he was a good -sailor. He fought in battles for his country and proved that he was a -fine soldier. He read many books and wrote beautiful poems. In those -times, or any other times, it would be hard to find a better, braver, -finer gentleman than Walter Raleigh. - -For many years the English people had given little thought to America. -When they found John Cabot did not discover a short way to India, they -lost interest in the New World. - -Walter Raleigh, however, did not think like the rest of his people. - -"O Queen," he said to Elizabeth, "you are a great ruler. But you -could become more powerful still. Why do you not claim some of that -land across the great ocean before Spain seizes all of it? We have -learned from sea captains who have been there lately that it is rich in -beautiful woods and many other good things." - -Raleigh hated the Spaniards and had already fought against them in the -wars. He knew they were settled in Mexico, Florida, and the West Indies. -He did not wish them to get hold of the rest of America. Neither he nor -Elizabeth, however, dreamed of the great size of the country. - -"I will fit out some ships," the queen answered, "and you may send -people to settle on the land which I will give you in America." - -Two ships were made ready. The men who sailed in them did not plan to -settle in America. They went only to look around and find a good place -where settlers could come afterward. - -They landed on different islands near the shores of the mainland. It -was farther north than Florida. The air was warm and pleasant. The -explorers found many fine trees of oak and cedar. Grapes and melons, -corn and peas, were plentiful. - -The Indians whom they met seemed willing to be friends. They admired -the white skins of their visitors and brought presents to them. The -white men gave them beads and other cheap ornaments. - -The Englishmen stayed among them for several weeks. The Indian women -made feasts for their visitors and bathed their feet and washed their -clothes. The time came at last when the white men said: - -"We must go back to England and tell about this beautiful country. We -will take home some furs and skins and we will carry a bracelet of -pearls to Walter Raleigh." - -How his eyes must have sparkled at the sight of the pearls! They were -as large as peas. - -"The Indian women wear such pearls as ornaments," the sailors said. -"The men often go about with reeds in their mouths. Bowls of walnut -shell are fastened to these reeds and filled with the dried leaves of a -strange plant. Then the Indians set the leaves on fire. They suck the -smoke through the reeds and blow it out of their mouths. They seem to -take great pleasure in doing this." - -The sailors were speaking of the tobacco plant and the smoking of its -leaves. They had never seen either before. - -[Illustration: THE ENGLISH TRADING WITH THE INDIANS] - -Elizabeth was much pleased with what she heard. She said: - -"This beautiful country shall be called Virginia in honor of myself." - -The queen was not married. She sometimes said: "I am wedded to my -country, and that is enough." It was because of this that she was often -spoken of as the "Virgin Queen." She always liked to be called by this -name. - -At this time she made Walter Raleigh a knight and that is why he has -always since been called _Sir_ Walter Raleigh. - -The next year he sent out one hundred people to settle in Virginia. -They must have been very brave to seek a new home among the Red Men -across the great ocean. They landed on one of the islands which their -people had visited the year before. They set to work at once to make a -home for themselves. - -It was not long before some rough houses were built and English -housekeeping was begun in America. - -The Indians were not as kind as they were the year before. They were -jealous of the white men. They thought: - -"It was well enough for them to visit us, but we do not wish them to -live here." - -They had good reasons for not liking the strangers, for the white men -did not treat them wisely. - -I will tell you of one thing that happened to make the Indians angry. -When the Englishmen were on an exploring expedition a silver cup was -stolen. - -"The Indians have taken it," they cried. - -They were so angry they marched to an Indian town near by and burned -it to the ground. The red people of the town fled into the woods, so -no harm was done to them. They were very angry, however, because their -homes were destroyed. They said to one another: - -"Let us drive the white strangers from our land. They do us nothing but -harm." - -From this time the settlers were not safe. They never knew when the -Indians might attack them. Many of them were sick and longed to go back -to England. - -When summer came and an English ship sailed into the harbor, most of -them were glad to get on board and bid good-bye to America. - -They carried back with them three things which did not grow in England. -These were Indian corn, white potatoes, and tobacco. - -Sir Walter Raleigh planted the potatoes at his home in Ireland. The -people there liked them so much that potatoes were soon growing in -every part of the country. That is why they were afterwards called -"Irish potatoes." - -As for the tobacco, Sir Walter became so fond of smoking it that he was -often seen with a pipe in his mouth. Of course, this was then a strange -sight in Europe. The first time the knight's servant saw his master -smoking, he was frightened. He thought Raleigh was on fire. He rushed -forward with a pitcher of water and dashed it over his head. The sudden -bath must have been a surprise, but it probably made the good knight -laugh heartily. - -Though the first settlers came back from America, Raleigh thought: - -"I will not give up so easily. Virginia is a beautiful country. It will -make a good home. I will try again to make a settlement there." - -The very next year he sent out a still larger number of people. There -were men, women and children. When they reached the island where -the first settlers had lived, they found the English fort had been -destroyed. Deer were roaming freely through the deserted village. - -They did not lose heart. They set to work and new houses were soon -built. They tried to make friends with the Indians. - -At this time a dear little baby was born. She was named Virginia in -honor of the queen and of her parents' new home. She was the first -white child of English people born in this great land of America. - -Poor little Virginia Dare! You shall now hear her sad story. Her -grandfather was the governor of the English settlement. After a while -he said to his people: - -"I will sail back to England to get help, for the Indians are not -friendly to us." - -He was gone a long time—much longer than he expected to be. When he -reached England he found that war was going on, and Raleigh was busy -fighting for his country. - -Two ships, however, were loaded with supplies and started to America. -Alas! they had not gone far before they had a fight with the Spaniards -and were obliged to go back to England. - -It was three years before Virginia's grandfather was able to cross the -ocean again. What long, anxious years they must have been! - -When he reached Virginia there was not one of his people to greet him; -no daughter to meet him with smiles and kisses; no little grandchild to -sit on his knee and put her arms around his neck. - -All were gone—the fort, the village, men, women, and children. He -looked about for a sign of what had happened. This only met his eyes: -It was a tree into which these letters had been hurriedly cut: - - C-R-O-A-T-A-N - -What was the meaning of these letters? Was it to let him know that the -white people could be found among the Croatan Indians? Had they been -made prisoners by that tribe of Red Men? He went to them and to other -tribes in the country around, but he was not able to learn anything -about his lost dear ones. At last he went back to England with a sad -heart. - -No one knows to this day whether Virginia Dare was killed by the Red -Men or whether she lived to grow up among their children and learn -their ways and language. She and her people are spoken of to-day as -"The Lost Colony." - -When Sir Walter Raleigh heard the sad news he was discouraged. He had -spent all his money and still had no colony. Queen Elizabeth died a few -years after this. King James, who now ruled over England, was not his -friend. - -The king kept the brave knight in prison for twelve long years. At last -he ordered the good Sir Walter Raleigh's head to be cut off. - -This was the end of that brave Englishman, after a life of good and -noble deeds. - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -THE STORY OF A DARING MAN - - -"What a pity no one knows what became of little Virginia Dare," said -Lucy, sadly. "I hope she wasn't killed by the Indians. I'd rather think -she died of the measles or scarlet fever." - -"Poor little child," said Uncle Sam softly. "It must have been a rough -life for her in the wild woods of the New World at that time, even if -the cruel savages had let her alone. My heart goes out also to Sir -Walter Raleigh, for he worked so hard to have English people settle -here. The saddest part of it is that he did not succeed. - -"He lived long enough, however, to hear of other people going to -Virginia and making a home there. They would surely have failed, too, -if it had not been for Captain John Smith." - -"What a common name that is," said Joe. "I know two boys named John -Smith." - -"A common enough name, to be sure," answered Uncle Sam. "But the John -Smith I am thinking of was very different from any other. If you -children can stay long enough this evening, I will tell you about him." - -"Mother said we needn't come home till eight o'clock unless you got -tired of us before that time." - -"The idea of my getting tired of you and Joe, Lucy! I would be a lonely -old man if it were not for you children. You help to keep me young. -I can't think what I should do, either, if I had no one to listen to -the stories that keep running through my head. Just now it is fairly -bursting with the brave deeds of John Smith." - -"Dear me! Don't let it burst, Uncle Sam. Do begin the story this very -minute," cried Lucy, trying to look frightened. - -A moment afterward the little sitting-room was so still that anyone -could have heard the big clock ticking in the corner. Then Uncle Sam -began to tell of the strange life of - - -CAPTAIN JOHN SMITH - -Once upon a time there was a little boy who lived on a farm in England. - -When he was born his father and mother said, "We will call our son -John." - -As soon as he was old enough he was set to work at a trade. His parents -were poor and they thought, "It is a good thing to have a trade, for -then a man can always get his own living." - -The young John Smith could not agree with them. He did not like his -work, so he did what other boys sometimes do. He ran away. Then his -troubles began, for he had a hard life. He tried all sorts of things. - -He became a soldier and later he went to sea and was out in such a -terrible storm that his ship was wrecked. Again he was out in a ship -when another storm came up. - -"John Smith carries bad luck wherever he goes," the men whispered to -each other. "He has brought this storm upon us." - -They threw him overboard. As he was a good swimmer and not far from -land, he managed to reach the shore in safety. - -This is only one of the stories John Smith told of his strange life -when he was a young man. - -Not long after that adventure he took part in a war against the Turks. -He was as brave as ever, for at one time he killed three Turks and cut -off their heads. He had no one to help him do it, either. - -He did not succeed as well afterwards, for the Turks caught him and -made him a slave. His cruel master fastened an iron collar around his -neck and made him work very hard. He had to thresh wheat. - -One day when he was working in the wheat field his Turkish master rode -up on horseback and began to whip him. How angry he was! He seized his -heavy flail and killed the Turk with one blow. - -He must lose no time in getting away now. He lifted a bag of wheat to -the back of the horse, jumped up behind it, and off he rode as fast as -he could go. - -He wandered through the wilderness for a long time. At last he reached -the seashore and got on board an English ship. When he reached England -there were many people ready to listen to his wonderful adventures. - -On the other hand, John Smith heard many stories about the land across -the great ocean—of little Virginia Dare and her lost people, and of -the Red Men who lived such a free life in the forests of America. This -was not all, however, for people were saying: - -"Why not try again to settle in Virginia? It is a beautiful country. -The weather is warm and pleasant there. It must be easy enough to live -in such a place, if we can only get along with the Indians." - -John Smith eagerly listened to all this talk. England was too quiet for -him. He did not enjoy his life there, he liked excitement too well. He -said: - -"If a party sails to Virginia I should like to join it." - -He soon had a chance, for a number of men were at that time getting -ready to start. They were not the best kind of people to make a new -home in a strange land. Very few of them knew how to do any kind of -work. They had heard that the Spaniards found gold in America. They -thought they themselves might pick it up on the ground in Virginia. -They said to each other: - -"We will get rich in the easiest way in the world." - -They did not know how hard work it would be to make themselves safe, as -well as comfortable. - -They settled at a place they called Jamestown, in honor of James, the -king of England. - -When the Red Men saw these newcomers, they were not pleased. They were -not willing to have the Englishmen settle in their country. They said: - -"We will kill these white men before they have a chance to save -themselves." - -The English were taken by surprise. They did not have their guns with -them when the Indians drew near with their bows and arrows. It would -have been a sad day for John Smith and his party if the Indians had not -been frightened off. - -Something came whizzing over their heads. The next moment the branch of -a tree came tumbling down in the midst of them. - -"It is thunder," they thought. "The Great Spirit is angry with us." - -They fled from the place as fast as their legs would carry them. They -did not stop to look around to see what had happened. If they had seen, -they would not have understood. - -But the white men knew. Some of their friends on board of the ship had -seen their danger. They had fired a cross-bar shot from a cannon. That -was a bar of iron with a cannon-ball at each end. Such shot are not -allowed to be used now-a-days. - -Although John Smith and his friends were saved at this time, many other -troubles were waiting for them. - -They made some houses to live in, but made them so poorly that they -leaked and were very damp. They had brought food with them, but there -was not enough to last long. It is not strange that many of the party -became sick and died. - -Those who still lived looked at the gardens of the Indians with a great -longing. They watched the fields of corn waving in the breeze, and when -it was ripe they tried to buy the grain. - -They could not get it by offering money to the Red Men, for the savages -had no use for money—that is, for our kind of money. John Smith said -to his people: - -"I will tell you what I will do. I will take some beads and other cheap -trinkets and will go up the river in a boat. I can surely get some corn -if I am willing to give the trinkets in return." - -When the Indians saw the beads, bits of looking-glass, and other -ornaments, they longed to have them. They wanted them so much that they -gladly gave Smith a boatload of corn. In this way he saved his people -from sickness and death. - -These white men called themselves "gentlemen." They had never done any -work in England. John Smith showed them they could only save their -lives by work. It must be hard work, too. - -If it had not been for him they would not have known enough even to -build their houses. He taught them how to plough the ground and plant -corn so as to raise a crop for themselves. He said to them: - -"We ought to protect our settlement by setting up a wall of stakes -around it." - -Such a wall is called a palisade. It would have been helpful in keeping -their enemies away. The wall was not built, however. The men were lazy -and they thought: - -"Captain Smith cannot be right. We are able to defend ourselves without -any palisade." - -King James very much wished the settlers to look for three things. They -were to search for Virginia Dare and her people; they must find gold, -and they were also to look for some waterway through the land leading -to the Pacific Ocean, or the South Sea, as it was then called. - -It was more than a hundred years since Columbus discovered America. Yet -still no one dreamed of the size of this country. How surprised John -Smith and his people would have been to learn that they would have to -travel three thousand miles westward before they reached another ocean. - -As soon as Captain Smith had a chance he sailed along the shores and up -the rivers. He was looking for a way to reach the South Sea. One day he -went up the James River in a boat with two of his friends. They came to -another and smaller river flowing into the James. - -"Let us see where this will carry us," said Smith. - -They went on and on. The river became narrower and narrower. At last -Smith jumped ashore and left the other two men in charge of the boat. -He told them to guard it and on no account to leave it for a minute. He -would go inland to see what he could find. - -He had not gone far when some Indians crept out of the woods. They took -the two men by surprise and killed them. Then the savages hurried after -Smith. He fought hard and managed to make a prisoner of one of the -Indians. - -Quick as a flash, he bound his prisoner in front of him. In this way -he made a shield for himself. The Indians could not shoot at the white -man without running the risk of killing one of their own people. - -By this time they had driven Smith into a swamp. The brave man was -sinking deeper and deeper into the mud. It was not long before he sank -up to his waist in it. He could no longer run nor fight. He would have -to give himself up. - -He made a sign to his enemies that he would let them take him. - -Even after they had taken him ashore he had hope. With quick thought -he drew a small compass from his pocket and offered it to the leader -of the party. He told the Indian to look at the needle. He showed how -it pointed. He explained that anyone who carried it could tell in what -direction he was going. - -The savage was so pleased that he would not let the others do Smith any -harm. They started for their home with their prisoner. They did not -travel like white men. They walked in single file and made no noise. - -They carried Smith to several Indian villages. Everyone was curious to -see him. Many of their people had never looked at a white man before. -They said to each other: - -"Is he a friend or an enemy to us? He is certainly very wise and brave." - -They looked at the compass and saw that it would really tell -directions. They thought: - -"No common man could have such a wonderful thing as that." - -Smith wrote a letter to his friends in Jamestown and asked the Indians -to send it to them. When the Red Men had done this and found that those -queer marks on a piece of paper told a story to the white men, they -were even more surprised. They said: - -"We do not dare to kill our prisoner, he is too powerful." - -What should they do with him? While they were trying to make up their -minds about this, they kept Smith shut up in a hut. They were not cruel -to him, however. O, no. They brought him quantities of food to eat. -There were bread made of corn, roasted deer meat, and all the dainties -which they themselves liked best. Smith thought: - -"They are trying to make me fat before they kill me." - -This thought took away all wish for food. The poor man could scarcely -eat. - -Day after day went by until at last the Red Men said: - -"We will take our prisoner to the great chief, Powhatan, and he will -tell us what to do." - -Smith was brought out and carried in a strange procession to the -village in which the chief was then living. He was kept there for some -time before the chief would receive him. - -When the day came at last, Powhatan was dressed in the grandest Indian -fashion. He wore a long robe made of feathers. His face and arms were -painted. His people stood around him. He wished Smith to think he was -great and powerful. - -The white man was brought before him. Smith eagerly watched to see if -there were any signs of mercy in the stern face. - -Powhatan talked for some time with his warriors. Then two of them got -up and went to the side of their white prisoner. - -They led him off a short distance and stretched him out on the ground. -They placed his head on a stone. - -"They are going to kill me," Smith said to himself. "I am bound so -tightly I cannot possibly get away. There is no help for me now." - -Then a strange thing happened. Just as one of the Indians raised his -club to end the white man's life, a young girl rushed to his side. She -was Powhatan's favorite daughter. She threw her arms around Smith's -neck. Then, turning toward her father, she cried: - -"Spare this man's life for my sake." - -The beautiful girl had grown to love Smith during his stay in the -village. While he was shut up as a prisoner he had made whistles and -strings of beads for her. His kindness pleased her and her gentle heart -was filled with pity for the white man. - -Powhatan could not refuse the daughter he loved so dearly. He said: - -"I will spare the man's life for the sake of my child. He shall stay -among us and spend his time making ornaments for Pocahontas." - -This is the story Smith afterwards told of the time when he was in the -hands of the Indians. Some people, however, do not believe it is quite -all true. - -At any rate, his life was saved and Pocahontas was the friend of the -white people ever after. - -In a few weeks Powhatan said to John Smith: - -"You may go back to Jamestown if you will promise to send me two -cannons and a grindstone as soon as you arrive." - -Smith was quite willing to make the promise. - -When he was once more safe among his own people he found they were in -great trouble. Some of them were planning to run away in the only large -boat. The others would then be left to the mercy of the Red Men. They -were all much in need of their wise leader. - -The promise to Powhatan was not forgotten. The Indians, however, who -had come back with Smith to get the cannons and the grindstone could -not carry them home. They were too heavy. So the men were quite willing -to take some trinkets instead. - -Many times after that the people of Jamestown suffered because they did -not have enough to eat. They were saved again and again by Pocahontas, -who filled her boat with baskets of corn and paddled down the river to -her white friends. - -One evening she heard her people making a plan. They said: - -"We will creep upon the Englishmen and take them by surprise. Then we -will kill them." - -She was brave as well as good. She did not lose a moment, but hurried -away through the dark woods. She did not stop till she reached -Jamestown. Then she told of the Indians' plot. She warned Smith to be -on his guard. Then she hurried away into the darkness once more. - -The white men tried again and again to make friends with Powhatan. They -gave him a bedstead, a red cloak, and a wash-basin. They thought he -would now be willing to sell them corn. - -Not so, however. After he received these presents, the great chief -became so proud he would not think of trading with the Englishmen. - -They were almost starving when Smith thought of a new plan. He took a -box of blue glass beads and showed them to Powhatan. He said: - -"These beads are made of the same stuff as the sky itself." - -When the chief heard this he longed to have some for his own. What -precious things they must be! - -"I will sell you a boatload of corn for those beads," he promised. - -"You will see by this that Captain Smith did not always tell the -truth. It was because of just such deceits as this that the white men -afterwards had so much trouble with the Indians," said Uncle Sam. - -The corn was just what Smith wanted, but he would not let the savages -know how glad he was. His boat was quickly filled with the precious -grain and he set out for Jamestown with a happy heart. - -His troubles were not yet at an end. One day while he was at work, a -bag of gunpowder exploded near him. Poor Captain Smith was badly burned -and in great pain. Worse still, the burned flesh did not heal after -many days. - -"I cannot get well here. I must go back to England," he told his -friends. - -With a sad heart he bade them good-bye and left them to get along as -well as they could by themselves. - -When Captain John Smith had gone, one trouble after another fell upon -the people of Jamestown. They came near starving to death. They were -glad to eat anything which would keep them alive. Dogs, snakes, and -even toads were killed for food. - -Most of the men had already died when some ships came sailing into the -harbor. They brought some more settlers, as well as food and clothing -from England. The worst was now over. - -Pocahontas was still the friend of the white men. She grew up to be a -beautiful young woman and married an Englishman named John Rolfe. The -wedding took place in a little church at Jamestown. - -From that time the great chief Powhatan was the friend of the white men. - -The rest of the story of Pocahontas is soon told. She was a good wife -to John Rolfe, and a year after they were married they had a lovely -baby boy. John Rolfe went to England on business and took his wife and -baby with him. The beautiful Pocahontas was invited to court by the -king. She was treated with great honor as an Indian princess, but it -did not make her vain or silly. - -While she was in England she met her old friend John Smith. She had -been told that he was dead and she was much moved at seeing him. - -Alas! Pocahontas did not live to see her own home again. Just as she -was about to sail to America a dreadful sickness came up her. It was -the smallpox. She died in a few days, but her baby son went back with -his father to Jamestown and lived to be a noble man. - -John Smith is often called the father of Virginia. After his burns had -healed, he left England in search of new adventures. - -He sailed again to the shores of America. He came to a place much -farther north than Jamestown. He looked upon a land with rocky shores. -It was not like Virginia. He called this part of America "New England" -and so it has been called ever since. - -Smith sailed all along the shores of New England. He went in and out of -its bays and harbors. He made a good map of what he saw. Then he went -back to his own country to show his map to the king. - -The next year he sailed on his last voyage. This time he wished to -settle in New England. He met with many troubles. There was a dreadful -storm and he was chased by pirates. Last of all, he was overtaken by a -fleet of French ships and made a prisoner. After a while he managed to -escape and get back to England. - -This brave and daring man lived long enough to hear of other people -settling in New England. That is another story, however. - -As Uncle Sam stopped speaking, Joe jumped up, crying: - -"Hurrah for Captain John Smith! Next to Columbus he was the bravest man -I ever heard of. I wish I could have seen him kill that Turk." - -"I should have liked to have been there when he offered those blue -beads to Powhatan," said Lucy. "He must have been laughing inside when -he did it." - -"As for me, I like to think of his making those lazy Englishmen do some -work," said Uncle Sam, stroking his chin. - -The neighbors all said there was no laziness about Uncle Sam, so it is -no wonder he spoke as he did. - -"Uncle Sam is like John Smith in some ways," the children's father said -not long afterwards. - -He had come into the back yard where Joe was stretched on the ground -with Lucy's arms around his neck. - -"We are playing that I am John Smith and Lucy is Pocahontas. She is -trying to save my life. Uncle Sam told us all about them." Joe sat up -to explain. - -"Yes, Uncle Sam is a good deal like John Smith. He is afraid of -nothing. He is always busy, and he can turn his hand to anything. One -time when he was a boy he was out sailing. The sail was an old one and -a sudden gust of wind caught it and tore it badly. Uncle Sam was a long -way from home and the sun was already setting. Quick as a thought he -took off his shirt, tore it open, and patched the sail with it. That -was the very thing John Smith did when he was away from Jamestown on -one of his excursions." - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -HENRY HUDSON - - -"Listen! That is thunder, Uncle Sam. I'm afraid we are going to have a -storm. I wish I had covers to my ears so I couldn't hear that dreadful -rumbling." - -"Nonsense, Lucy. There is no use in being afraid of anything. You -should have lived long ago among the Dutchmen in New York. They would -have told you it wasn't thunder, but was the sound made by Henry Hudson -and his men as they played ninepins with the dwarfs in the caves of the -Catskill mountains. - -"But there! You don't know anything about Henry Hudson. Sit down, dear, -in that little chair close to me and turn your back to the window. Then -you will not see the lightning. I will tell you such a nice story you -will not listen to the thunder, either." - -"I ought not to be afraid with you, Uncle Sam. I wish Joe were here, -though. He would like to hear the story." - -"I will tell it to him some other time, Lucy. Or you may tell him -yourself. But here he comes now, just in time." - -Uncle Sam leaned back in his armchair, pulled the beard on his chin, -and began the story of - - -HENRY HUDSON AND THE DUTCHMEN - -It is nearly three hundred years since John Smith went to Jamestown. -He left a dear friend in England who was also a great sea captain. His -name was Henry Hudson. - -At that time England was jealous of Spain because of her riches. The -Spaniards had found many gold and silver mines in America. - -England was also jealous of Portugal, a small country joining Spain. -The Portuguese had found a way of reaching India by sailing southward -around Africa and then eastward. They brought home shiploads of gums, -spices, precious stones and rare woods. So the Englishmen thought: - -"We must get rich, too. Why cannot we reach India by sailing to the -northeast or the northwest?" - -They looked about for a brave and able captain who should find out if -this could be done. They chose Henry Hudson. - -He sailed into the northern seas. He met with icebergs that made the -air very cold when they were still a long way off. He saw many whales. - -Henry Hudson and his men killed some of the whales. They boiled the fat -and made many barrels of oil. This was the best oil known at that time -for burning in lamps. It was also useful in other ways. - -The brave captain sailed far into the northern seas. It was now so cold -that great masses of ice almost stopped the ship. - -"We must turn back," Henry Hudson said to his men. "It is of no use to -sail any farther northward in hopes of finding a passage to India." - -When he got back to England, the people were pleased to learn about the -whales. They sent more ships to capture the great monsters and bring -home the oil. - -Once more they sent Henry Hudson to look for a short way to India by a -northern passage. - -Again he failed because of the ice in the waters, and again he came -home disappointed. - -About this time the people of Holland heard of Henry Hudson and what he -was trying to do. People who live in that country are called Dutch or -Dutchmen. It was a rich country for so few people. They said: - -"We had better send for this English captain. We will get him to sail -in our ships. We do not wish the Englishmen to find a shorter way to -India than we know now. If they do, they will become richer than we -are." - -So they sent for Hudson. They offered him such good pay that he went to -Holland and made ready to take one of their ships into the north. As he -was about to sail he received a letter from his old friend John Smith. - -The letter told him he should sail to the westward if he wished to find -the best way of reaching India. Just north of Virginia there was a -narrow strait. If a ship passed through that strait, it would enter the -ocean that washes the shores of India. - -We all know now that Captain John Smith was wrong about this. But Henry -Hudson thought it must be true. - -He turned his ship, the Half Moon, towards the west. He sailed in that -direction till he reached the shores of Newfoundland. Then he went -southward as far as Virginia, keeping near the coast. He now turned his -ship about and slowly sailed to the north. He entered many of the bays -and coves that reached into the land. He was always on the lookout for -the strait of which Smith had written. - -At last he sailed into a fine harbor which no white men had ever seen -before. We call it to-day the harbor of New York and know it is one of -the best in the world. - -Indians came down to the shore in crowds. They were curious to see the -strange-looking boat and the people with the white faces and hands. The -Red Men wore feather cloaks and necklaces of copper. They wished to make -friends with their visitors and offered them beans, oysters, and tobacco. - -"What a beautiful country this is!" the white men thought. - -There were sweet smells in the air and the open places along the shore -were covered with grass and flowers. The ship did not remain long in -the harbor. Hudson found he was at the mouth of a river. He thought: - -"Who knows but that if I follow this river I may reach the Pacific -Ocean?" - -So the ship sailed farther and farther up the river. It stopped at -several places where friendly Indians came out to meet the white men. -Hudson landed at one of these places and visited an Indian chief. - -In the village he saw great piles of corn and beans. He noticed the -bark houses. The Red Men asked him to stay all night with them and -placed a mat on the ground for him to sit on. They brought him food in -a red wooden bowl. - -They wished to show that they were truly his friends, so they took some -arrows and threw them into the fire. This told him more than the Indian -words he could not understand. - -When he sailed again, Hudson noticed that the river was getting -narrower. At last it was so shallow that his ship could go no farther. -He sent some men in a small boat to see what they could find. - -"This is no way to the Pacific," they said when they came back. "The -river comes to an end just beyond us." - -The ship was turned about, and Hudson sailed down the river and out into -the harbor again. He gave his own name to the river he had discovered, -and it is still called the Hudson River. He never saw it again. - -Now came the long voyage across the ocean. The Dutch people were sorry -that Hudson had not found what he was looking for. They were pleased, -however, to learn of the lovely country and the wild animals covered -with fur that were to be found in its forests. - -"The Indians are pleasant and willing to be friends. They kill great -numbers of the wild animals with their bows and arrows and they tan the -skins." So the sailors said. - -"Why not send some of our people to live on the shores of the Hudson -River?" thought the thrifty Dutch. "They can carry with them shiploads -of knives, axes, beads, and other things the Red Men like. They can -trade those things for the furs that bring high prices here in Europe." - -This is how it happened that the Dutch people came to settle in America. - -They brought chests full of linen, as well as the shining pewter -dishes they used in housekeeping. In fact, they packed in their ships -everything they needed to make themselves comfortable and happy. - -When they built their houses in America they made them look as much -as possible like the homes they left behind them. They made their -fireplaces large enough to hold logs of great size. In the cold winter -evenings these logs crackled and burned brightly while the Dutchmen -with their wives and children sat before the fire and told stories. - -Every house had a porch. As the sun set and the moon came out in the -summer time, the men sat in the porches telling stories and smoking -their pipes while their wives sat knitting beside them and the children -romped and played around the dooryards. - -They still dressed in the fashions of their country. The men had hats -with broad brims and coats with wide skirts. The women wore so many -short skirts they looked like opened umbrellas. - -These Dutch people were honest and they had kind hearts, so they got -along pretty well with their Indian neighbors. They hated idleness and -they were very neat. - -All of them worked during the day, but when evening came it was a time -for rest and pleasure. Then were told the stories of the old days in -Holland, of fairies, and of the gnomes who lived underground digging -copper and gold. - -[Illustration: THE DUTCH CHILDREN AT PLAY] - -When the thunder rolled in the sky, they would nod to each other and -say: "It is only Henry Hudson and his men playing ninepins with the -dwarfs in the caves of the Catskill mountains." - -You shall now hear how this queer fancy came into their heads. - -After the brave captain had discovered the Hudson River and gone back -to Europe, he tried once more to find a short way to India. He thought -it best to cross the ocean again, but to sail farther north than he had -done on his first voyage to this country. - -After he had reached the shores of America, he came into a large bay. -The land around him was bare and dreary. The ship was kept all winter -in this bay on account of the ice. The sailors suffered very much from -the bitter cold. Many of them became sick and died before the spring -opened and the ice broke up enough to let the ship move on. - -By this time the food was almost gone. The day came when Hudson took -the last of the bread and divided it among his crew. He was so sad and -hopeless that tears filled his eyes. - -The sailors blamed him for bringing them there and were very angry -with him. They thought, "We shall all lose our lives through him." - -They were not even moved by his tears. When they had eaten the bread, -they seized him and put him and some sick sailors into a small boat. -Then they sent them adrift in the cold, dreary waters of the great bay. - -They were never heard of again. This is all we know of the last days of -that very brave Englishman, Captain Henry Hudson. - -As for the wicked sailors, some of them met with better fortune than -they deserved. Soon after they had treated their captain so badly, -birds came flying by. The men shot some of these and saved themselves -from starving. After that they had a fight with Indians on the shore -and several of the sailors were killed. The others managed to gather a -small supply of food with which they started for home. - -Even then they suffered a great deal from hunger. They were so weak -they had to sit down to sail the vessel. All of them would have died if -they had not met another ship, which took them aboard and carried them -home. - -Long before Uncle Sam had finished the story, the thunder-storm had -passed by. - -"I hardly noticed it. I was thinking all the time about Henry Hudson," -declared Lucy. - -"I suppose Hudson never met his old friend John Smith after he got the -letter," said Uncle Sam, thoughtfully. Then he went on, "They were both -Englishmen, yet those who settled in Virginia with John Smith made a -very different home for themselves from those made by the Dutch who -followed Henry Hudson. - -"The Dutch had their own ways; the English had theirs. The Dutch -planted gardens. They raised flocks of sheep, which furnished wool for -the women to card and spin. They gave beads and blankets of red wool to -their Indian neighbors. They took in return game and beautiful furs. -They sent the furs to Holland. - -"They got up in the morning at sunrise, and went to bed at sunset. They -ate dinner at eleven o'clock in the morning, and tea parties were often -given at three in the afternoon. - -"They had grand times at Christmas and New Year's, when feasts were -spread and everyone dressed in his best clothes. - -"It was the Dutchmen who gave Santa Claus to American children. They -brought the dear old fellow from Holland along with their chests of -linen and pewter dishes." - -"Hurrah for the Dutchmen! I say," exclaimed Joe. "Christmas wouldn't be -half the fun it is without Santa Claus. Do you know, Uncle Sam, last -year was the first time Lucy and I knew he was not a real man. Why, we -used to think he came down our chimney every Christmas Eve with his -pack of presents. We talked up the chimney to him when we went to bed -and told him what we wanted. I know now that you and father and mother -are the only Santa Claus." - -"Now I think of it, the pictures of Santa Claus make him look like a -fat and jolly old Dutchman," said Lucy. - -"After their people were well settled, the children of Virginia enjoyed -Christmas," Uncle Sam went on. "They lived on big plantations where -their fathers raised tobacco. The houses were large and pleasant. -Beautiful trees grew near and gave plenty of shade in the hot summer -time. - -"At Christmas, wild turkeys were roasted in the big fireplaces. The -rooms were trimmed with holly and evergreens. There were dinner -parties, and dances that lasted all night. The ladies wore flowered -silk dresses with long trains. Their hair was powdered and 'done up' -on the head so it looked like a tower. The men wore knee-breeches and -shoes with bright buckles. Their coats were of silk or velvet and -trimmed with much gold and silver lace. - -"The white people in Virginia did not work hard. They made their black -slaves care for the great fields of tobacco. - -"'Where did the black men come from?' I see the question in Lucy's eyes." - -Uncle Sam stopped for a moment to stroke his chin and slyly pull Joe's -hair, for the boy had turned his head to look at his sister. - -"Ouch! That isn't fair, Uncle Sam," cried Joe. "I will try to forgive -you, though, if you don't do it again and go on with your story." - -"The Dutch were the first ones to bring slaves to Virginia. They sailed -to Africa and caught the poor savages in their homes. Then they carried -them on board ship and afterwards sold them to the white planters in -America. That is one way the Dutch became rich. - -"You may praise the Dutch for giving you Santa Claus, Joe. You may -blame them, however, for being the first to bring the dreadful curse -of slavery to this beautiful land." - -Uncle Sam was getting excited. - -"We may thank the Lord for sending us a good helper. It is because of -that helper that the people of America are now free." - -The old man got up and made a deep bow before a picture hanging above -the organ. - -"There is the face of one who loved his fellow men," he said, pointing -to the picture. - -"When you children know a little more about your country, you shall -hear the story of Abraham Lincoln." - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -THE PILGRIMS - - -"I think mother cooks the best Thanksgiving dinners in the world," said -Joe, with a sleepy yawn. "It seems as though I could never be hungry -again." - -"It is no wonder you feel as you do. I don't see where in that small -body of yours you were able to stow away so much turkey and mince pie, -to say nothing of the squash and mashed potatoes, the cranberry sauce, -nuts and raisins," said Uncle Sam. "I wonder if you ever thought why we -celebrate Thanksgiving Day. The people of other countries do not have -this holiday. If you are not too sleepy I will tell you about it." - -Uncle Sam had been spending the day with the parents of Joe and Lucy. -The children's mother had said, "Thanksgiving wouldn't be Thanksgiving -without Uncle Sam to share it with us. Even if my sister Mary comes -with her whole family, we can make room at the table for our dear old -friend." - -The great dinner had been eaten and cleared away. The short day was -coming to an end when Uncle Sam spoke of a reason for Thanksgiving Day. - -"Sleepy! I guess not. A story is just the thing before the lamps are -lighted and we play games," said Lucy. - -"Just the thing," repeated her cousin Mabel. She was a year younger -than Lucy and copied everything the older girl said and did. - -"We all like stories," added Arthur, a tall boy of ten years. He was -quiet and fond of books—very different from noisy Joe, who loved him -the best of all his cousins. - -"Once upon a time," began Uncle Sam, "there were some people who lived -in England. They were good and honest, but they could not do just as -they wished. The king said everyone in the country must worship God in -a certain way. That way must be the same in every church. - -"It happened that some of his people did not agree with the king. They -said: 'Everyone ought to worship God, but all should be free to worship -in the way they like best.' - -"These people gathered together, and every Sunday they met in their own -little churches. This did not please the king and he made their lives -very unpleasant. - -"Of course they were not happy. They thought: 'Why should we stay here -in England where we are treated so badly? Holland is not far away and -the Dutch people are kind and friendly. They are willing that everyone -in their country should worship as he likes. Let us go to Holland where -we can be free.' - -"The plan seemed good. A small company of men, women and children left -England for a home among the Dutch. - -"At first, they were happy and contented in Holland. The boys and girls -became men and women. The babies grew up into boys and girls. One thing -grieved their parents. Their children were fast forgetting the English -language. There were no English schools where they could learn their -lessons. - -"'This is not right,' said the older ones. 'No people could be kinder -than our Dutch friends, but we do not wish our own children to grow up -and forget their own country and the beautiful English language.' - -"'I will tell you what we can do,' said one. 'We have heard a good -deal about America. Some of our people have settled in Virginia. They -write that it is a fine place and that the air is soft and pleasant -all the year. Let us go to America. We will seek a home not far from -Virginia.' - -"The others thought these were wise words. They left their Dutch -friends and went back to England. They wished to visit it once more -before they bade it good-bye forever. - -"Two ships were soon ready and one hundred pilgrims sailed for America -in the year 1620. - -"'We are like pilgrims,' they had said to each other, 'for we travel -from place to place.' From that day to this they have been called by -the name of the 'Pilgrims.' - -"They had not sailed far before one of the ships began to leak. Its -captain said: 'It is not safe to cross the ocean in such a poor boat.' -So he turned back to England. - -"All the Pilgrims now crowded into the second ship. It was called the -'Mayflower.' - -"A long voyage was before the travelers. They were tossed about by -storm and wind. Almost all of them were seasick. A hundred people in -the small cabin of the Mayflower must surely have had a hard time. - -"Land was sighted at last. It was their first view of their future -home, America. How happy the children must have felt when they thought -of running and playing on dry land once more! - -"It was in November when they sailed around the end of Cape Cod. The -Pilgrims had not meant to come so far north of Virginia. - -"Some of the men left the ship and went on shore. They found a place -where the earth looked as though it had been lately dug up. Perhaps -something was buried in this spot. Sure enough! It was some dried corn -which the Indians had put there for safe keeping. - -"The men were pleased at the goodly sight. They carried the corn to the -ship. 'We may have need of it,' they said. They were honest people, so -when they afterwards found out what Indians had stored the corn there, -they paid for it quite willingly. - -"A brave man named Miles Standish had come with the Pilgrims. He was -English, like themselves. They first met him while they were living in -Holland. He had gone there to help the Dutch in a war against Spain. - -"Miles Standish did not belong to the same church as the Pilgrims, yet -the more he knew them, the better he liked them. When they spoke of -coming to America he said: - -"'I will go with you to your new home.' - -"They were much pleased, for he was a brave and able soldier. He could -help them if they had trouble with the Indians. - -"After they found the corn, some one proposed to go along the coast in -a small boat. It would be the best way of finding a place to settle. As -they moved along, they saw some huts covered with mats. They thought -these must be the homes of Indians. - -"They went back to the ship without finding a place to settle. Some -days after that they started out again. It was a very cold day in -December. The spray froze as it fell on their clothing. - -"When they were several miles from the ship they landed and made ready -to spend the night out of doors. They built a wall of logs. They said: - -"'We can sleep behind this wall. Then if the Indians should creep upon -us, we can defend ourselves.' - -"They had no trouble during the night, but in the morning there was a -terrible sound. It was not like anything they had ever heard before. It -was the warwhoop of the Indians. - -"'The guns!' They were in the boat where the men had just carried them. -There was a quick rush to the shore, while arrows came whizzing about -their heads. Then 'Bang! bang!' went the guns, and the frightened -Indians ran back into the woods. - -"The Indians thought the white men carried thunder and lightning in the -iron tubes. Although brave, they could not stand against such fearful -weapons. - -"The explorers hastened away. After a while they came into a small -harbor. The land along the shore had been cleared of woods. Brooks -flowed through it into the sea. - -"'This would be a good place for our people to live,' Miles Standish -thought. The others thought so too. - -"John Smith had visited this very place before and had marked it on his -map. As soon as the men came back, the ship set sail and brought the -pilgrims to the chosen spot. - -"'God's will has led us here,' thought the good people. 'It must be -the best place for our new home.' - -"One hundred persons had left England, but one hundred and two landed -on Plymouth Rock. How was that?" - -Uncle Sam smiled as he looked at the faces of the wondering children. - -"This was the way of it. Two babies had come to the Pilgrims on their -way to America. One was born in mid-ocean, so they called him Oceanus. -The other was a little girl who first saw the daylight when her people -were near the shores of their new home. - -"'We will name her Peregrine,' said her parents. 'Peregrine means -wanderer, and she is a little wanderer, without doubt.' - -"How good it must have seemed to the women and children when they left -the small, close cabin and the dirty ship. They had to live on board, -however, until the men had built a long, rough house on the hillside. -The whole party would have to live in this till better homes could be -made for each family. - -"Not long after the big house was done, the captain of the ship said: - -"'I cannot wait around here any longer. I must go back to England. Take -all your goods from my ship as quickly as possible.'" - -"I should think the Pilgrims would have hated to see the ship leave," -said Joe. "If they got homesick they couldn't go back to England, no -matter how bad they felt." - -"They were not the kind of people to give up," replied Uncle Sam. -"Before they went on shore they had a meeting in the cabin of the -Mayflower. They made some good laws for themselves. They all promised -to obey them. Those promises were very helpful when troubles came. - -"And troubles did come, too! The first winter at Plymouth, which was -the name they gave their new town, seemed to them long and very cold. -It was not really a very hard winter for _New_ England, but the climate -from which they had come was much milder. In _Old_ England they were -not used to so much cold, snow and ice as they now had, and they did -not know how to protect themselves properly. - -"The food was poor and scarce. The one big house was not made tight -enough. The freezing air, snow and rain came though the many cracks. -One brave Pilgrim after another was seized with fever or other illness. -Before the warm days of spring came to cheer them one-half of them had -died. Alas! little baby Oceanus was one of these. - -"They did not sit still and think over their troubles. Everyone who was -able kept at work. The men cut down trees in the forest with which to -build houses and a little church. They caught fish and lobsters. They -dug clams. - -"The women washed and cooked and spun, and made everything as homelike -as they could for their husbands and children. The men carried their -muskets with them wherever they went. Miles Standish had told them: - -"'We do not know when the Indians may take us by surprise. We must be -always ready.' - -"The very day when the Pilgrims first stepped on Plymouth Rock they saw -Indians peeking at them from over the hilltop. That was all, however. -In a few minutes the Red Men were out of sight. It was a long time -before any of them were seen again. - -"One day early in the spring the white men were having a meeting to -talk over some plans. Suddenly an Indian came into their midst. He was -painted in the best style of his people. He wore a bear-skin over his -shoulders. - -"The men hastily seized their muskets. The Indian calmly looked from -one face to another. He seemed in no hurry. Then he slowly said: - -"'Welcome, welcome, Englishmen!' - -"How good those words sounded! All were filled with wonder and delight. -They were puzzled to think where this savage had learned English words. - -"'Welcome, welcome, Indian.' - -"Then they led him to their house and gave him a good dinner. Samoset, -for that was his name, seemed in no hurry to leave. He stayed hour -after hour. When night came the Pilgrims made up a warm bed by the side -of the fireplace. He slept there all night, while the white men kept -watch. They were not yet sure whether he meant to be their true friend. -When morning came they gave him some presents and he went away proud -and happy. - -"He soon came back, bringing with him his friend Squanto and some other -Indians. - -"Squanto could talk more English than Samoset. He told the Pilgrims he -had seen white men before and had lived with them. He had crossed the -great ocean with a white captain who came to Plymouth with John Smith. - -"The white people had treated him kindly and had afterwards brought him -back to his old home. It was the very place where the Pilgrims were now -living. When Squanto got back he found that his family had all died of -a dreadful sickness. Many of his tribe had died from it at the same -time. That was why the others had burned their homes and moved away -from Plymouth. - -"Squanto was a good friend to the white men. He came to live with them. -He showed them how to plant corn so it would grow well. He put a dead -fish in each hill to make the ground rich. He taught them the Indian -ways of hunting and fishing. If it had not been for his kindness and -knowledge the rest of the Pilgrims might have died for want of food. - -"'God has sent us this friend,' thought the good people of Plymouth. - -"Not far away from them lived an Indian chief named Massasoit. Squanto -belonged to his tribe. 'We would like to see Massasoit,' said the chief -men of the Pilgrims. They thought they would be much safer from attack -if they made peace with the Indian chief who lived nearest them. - -"One day the great chief came to Plymouth. He liked the white men. -Before he went away he promised to be friendly to them. Massasoit kept -his word and was a good and true friend to the Pilgrims until he died. - -"One time news came to Plymouth that Massasoit was very sick. Some of -his white friends went to see him. They found him stretched on a rough -bed in his little hut. He had a fever. The hut was almost filled with -Indians. The medicine men were there. They were making a fearful noise. -They thought an evil spirit had taken hold of Massasoit. They were -trying to drive it away with the noise. Then the chief would get well. - -"The Indians have great faith in their medicine men. They are their -priests, as well as their doctors. - -"'That noise is enough to make anyone ill,' said the white men. 'The -air in the hut is heavy and very bad because there are so many people -in it. Massasoit can never get well at this rate.' - -"They got the crowd to leave the wigwam. Then they gave the sick chief -the proper medicine for his illness. The fever soon left the chief and -he believed that his white friends had saved his life. - -"One day an Indian who did not belong to Massasoit's tribe came into -Plymouth. He brought a snake-skin filled with arrows and laid it on the -ground. - -"'What is the meaning of this?' thought the chief men. - -"'It means war,' said Squanto. 'The Indians who sent it are not your -friends.' - -"The arrows were taken out of the snake-skin. Then it was filled with -bullets and sent back to the unfriendly Indians. - -"This said as plainly as any words: 'If you come to attack us with your -arrows, we will shoot you with our bullets.' - -"When the savages saw the bullets they were afraid. They said, 'Ugh! -Ugh!' but they did not dare to touch them. They at once sent the -fearful things back to Plymouth. They changed their minds about -fighting white people who used firearms." - -Uncle Sam stopped and looked around. - -"There's nothing like being brave," he said slowly. "The Pilgrims would -not even think of giving up, and that is why they held out against all -dangers. You remember I told you that only half of them lived through -that first winter. They were very careful not to let the savages know -how many of them had died. They were even careful not to make mounds -to mark the places where their friends were buried. They thought the -Red Men might count the mounds. They would know by that how few of the -settlers were left. - -"As soon as the spring came, corn was planted over the graveyard. The -tall stalks were soon waving to and fro, hiding it from sight." - -"Now the people were very busy. Gardens were planted; fish and lobsters -were caught in plenty, and everyone was happy. In the summer wild -berries were to be had for the picking, and the gardens which had been -planted began to yield nice vegetables. - -"Then came the beautiful days of the New England autumn. The harvests -ripened and fields of corn seemed to cry: - -"'Come, gather the golden grain and store it away for the cold days of -winter.' - -"Squashes and pumpkins and other good things were ready for the -picking. Men, women, and children were busy and joyous. - -"When the governor looked on the glad sight, he said: - -"'The Lord has blessed us. We should praise Him for His mercy to us in -this strange land.' - -"He set aside a day for prayer and thanksgiving. Feasts should be -spread and all work given up. His orders were followed. - -"That was the first Thanksgiving Day in America. - -"What numbers of pies and puddings were made for that day! What -quantities of fish and wild turkeys were brought by the men and cooked -by the women! - -"Thanksgiving morning came at last, and after a good breakfast everyone -went to church. In those days not even the babies were left at home, -but were carried to church in their mothers' arms. - -"There was a long service in the church. A very long one it must have -seemed to the children, who kept thinking of the great dinner to come -soon. The last hymn was sung, the last prayer made, and all turned -their steps to the tables loaded with good things to eat and drink. - -"The Pilgrims had invited Massasoit and some of his people to share -their feast. The Red Men were pleased when they received the invitation. - -"'We will do our part,' they said. - -"They took their bows and arrows and went out into the forest. They -shot some red deer. Early on Thanksgiving morning they arrived in -Plymouth, bringing the game they had killed. - -"When the great dinner was ready at last, one hundred Indians with -hungry stomachs were ready to share it with the white people. - -"It must have been hard to entertain the visitors. They could speak and -understand only a few words of English. Now and then they would give a -deep grunt to show they were well pleased. - -"They stayed not only to dinner, but to supper, also. Even then they -were in no hurry to go home. Many of them spent the night with their -white friends. They seemed to think Plymouth was a very pleasant place." - -It was quite dark outside before Uncle Sam finished the story of the -first Thanksgiving Day. But big logs were burning in the fireplace -and giving a soft light all over the room. The old man could see the -children's happy faces. He knew they were having a good time, though -they had kept so quiet. - -"I am ready for blind-man's-buff," he said, suddenly jumping up "I'll -be the blind man. Come, we have been still long enough." - -Lamps were quickly lighted. In a minute the room was filled with the -laughter of the Young folks as Uncle Sam dashed right and left trying -to catch them in his long arms. - -"The little Pilgrims though they had a good time on Thanksgiving Day. -But their parents would no let them make much noise. Dear me! If -children are not allowed to make a noise, they can't be happy." Uncle -Sam was talking to himself as he walked home after the party. - -Just then his big black cat rubbed against his legs. "Hullo, Buzz, is -that you. And did you think I was speaking to you? Here, smell of this -turkey bone. I brought it home so you could have a feast, too." - -Uncle Sam bent down and rubbed the cat's soft fur. The he went into the -house, leaving Buzz outside to enjoy his Thanksgiving supper. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -LITTLE PILGRIMS OF LONG AGO - - -"Pop! pop! pop!" went the corn as Joe shook the popper over Uncle Sam's -fire. - -"It is the very evening for roasted apples and pop-corn," the old man -said soon after his young friends arrived. "Joe, you run down cellar -and get some of the biggest apples you can find. Lucy, dear, take these -ears of corn and shell them. We will put the apples in the hot ashes -and pop the corn over those lovely red coals." - -"Oh, what fun!" cried Lucy. "You are always thinking of the nicest -things to do. I never knew anyone like you." - -"I hope the Pilgrims had a few Uncle Sams with them," said Joe, coming -back with the apples. - -"They popped corn sometimes, but not in our way," the old man said. "I -don't believe anyone of them ever saw a corn-popper. They used to hide -the kernels in the hot ashes and then watch for them to come shooting -out over the room. - -"Then what fun there was as the children scrambled to get them! They -enjoyed it, and I am glad they did. Poor little children, they did -not have too much fun at any time. You must not blame their parents, -though. They had been brought up that way themselves. They thought they -must be very strict or their children might grow up to be bad men and -women. - -"'Spare the rod and spoil the child,' they said over and over again. -And they also often repeated these words: 'Children should be seen and -not heard.' - -"Now I believe children should look forward to Sunday with pleasure," -Uncle Sam went on. "It ought to be the best day in the week for -everybody, young and old. But, dear me! the poor little Pilgrims had -to keep so still and sober from Saturday evening to Sunday evening, it -must have been painful. Not a loud word must be spoken, not a laugh -must be heard. Then there was the long sermon Sunday morning. Hours -long! Just think of it! - -"Rain or shine, heat or cold, everyone went to church. That is, unless -he was too sick to sit up. They went in a sort of procession. The women -and children walked in the middle. Some of the men marched ahead and -the rest at the end of the line. They carried their guns, for they must -be ready for an attack by the savages at any moment. - -"There was no fire in the church on the coldest day of winter. Some of -the people carried foot-stoves to keep themselves warm. These were iron -pans or cups in which live coals were carried. The children sat in one -part of the church and their parents in another." - -Joe smiled. - -"I know what you are thinking," said Uncle Sam, who noticed the smile. -"You are thinking that the children could whisper together during the -long sermon. That is a great mistake, Joe. There was always a man in -the church who looked out for such things. He stood where he could see -everything that was going on. He had a long stick with a squirrel tail -on one end and a hard knob on the other. - -"If he saw one of the older people nodding, softly and quickly the -'tithing man', as he was called, would be at the side of the erring -one. Then the furry end of the stick would dance over the sleepy one's -face and the eyes would open with a start. - -"But if a child began to whisper, he was not treated so gently. The -hard knob at the other end of the stick would suddenly come down on his -head and make it ache in a very unpleasant way. - -"The Pilgrims had no clocks. They used hour-glasses instead. - -"The tithing-man watched the hour-glass on the pulpit. The moment the -last grain of sand had fallen through, he walked softly up the aisle -and tipped the glass over. - -"The hours in church must have passed very slowly for the children. The -sermon was very, very long, and they could understand little of what -the minister said. - -"The poor children had no Santa Claus. Worse even than that, they had -no Christmas! Thanksgiving was the only great holiday of the year." - -"No Christmas!" cried Joe and Lucy together. - -"Why, Uncle Sam," Joe went on, "Christmas is the Christ Day. You know -what I mean. And the Pilgrims thought so much of the Bible and going to -church, and all that! Why, I don't understand." - -"They thought it was wrong to make a pleasure of religious things," -replied Uncle Sam. "It was many, many years before the fashion of the -Dutch people spread over America. It is a grand fashion, too. Well, -well, we cannot help it if the Pilgrims didn't celebrate Christmas, so -we will turn from that to the brave man whom the children admired so -much. - -"I shouldn't wonder if they were a little afraid of Miles Standish. He -had a wonderful sword which he prized above everything else. A Turk had -given it to him. It was marked with strange figures which the Pilgrims -did not understand. - -"'That sword will save you from harm so long as you keep it with you,' -the Turk had told the brave captain. - -"Miles Standish was a little man and at first the Indians made fun of -him. They thought he was too small to be much of a warrior. But they -found they had made a mistake in this and learned to fear him. - -"I think you children have never been to Plymouth. Next summer I will -take you there, if your mother is willing. You shall stand on the -rock where people say the Pilgrims landed. Then we will go up to the -Memorial Hall and look at Baby Peregrine's cradle and the chair of the -first governor. Dear me! I can't think of all the things saved from -those first days of Plymouth. We will see them all, though, and have a -good time." - -"That will be jolly fun," said Joe, jumping up and dancing around the -room. "I wish it were next summer now." - -"Don't be noisy Joe," said his sister. "Uncle Sam won't tell us -anything more, if you are." - -"I have told more now than you will remember, my dear," said her old -friend. "Before we leave the Pilgrims, however, I must say one thing. -After they were well settled, friends from England came to join them. -This made them very happy. - -"A few years afterwards, still other people came from England to live -in this part of the country. Their religion was not exactly the same as -that of the Pilgrims. They were called the Puritans. They said: - -"'We do not wish to go out of the English church. Yet we would like -to make it _pure_. Some things have grown up in it which we think are -wrong.' - -"There were many Puritans in England, but the king would not listen to -them. That is why they made up their minds to come to America. - -"They were not poor like the Pilgrims. They brought plenty of clothes -and furniture, horses, cattle, and pigs, and everything they needed -to make themselves comfortable. They did not have to suffer as the -Pilgrims did. - -"The first Puritans came to Salem. They said: - -"'The word Salem means peace. It is a good name for our new home.' - -"Hundreds of Puritans followed the first ones who came to America. -They settled in Boston and other places near by. They built forts and -schoolhouses, besides homes for themselves. - -"They planted wheat and rye as well as Indian corn. They cut down the -forests and caught fish and salted them. They bought furs from the -Indians, and sent them, as well as lumber and salt fish, to England. -The English people were glad to buy these things and sent in return -books, tools, and other things the Puritans needed in their new home." - -Uncle Sam stopped to rest a moment. Then he went on: - -"Maybe you think the Pilgrims were strict." - -Joe and Lucy nodded their heads. - -"Well, I suppose they were. We call their ways old-fashioned, -now-a-days. But if you had lived in their time, you would have been a -good deal happier with them than with the Puritans. - -"Strict! Why, the Puritans wanted to _make_ everybody believe just as -they did. They did not have any patience with those who did not agree -with them. - -"They had hard laws, too. They punished anyone who swore, or even -scolded. A high frame called the stocks stood in the middle of every -village. It had a number of holes in it. Many of those who did small -wrongs had to sit all day with their legs and arms through these holes. -That was the way they were held up to scorn. - -"Then there were ducking-stools. If women became common scolds, they -were bound to these stools and ducked in a river or pond. - -"Once in a while a man was caught swearing. It was a sad day for him. A -split stick was fastened on his tongue for hours together. If that did -not cure him, his tongue was burned with a red-hot iron. - -"The children had a hard time of it in school as well as at home. If -they told wrong stories, they had to hold out their tongues to be burnt -with a good dose of mustard." - -Uncle Sam looked quite sad as he went on to tell of a little girl who -took something which belonged to a playmate. - -"Her teacher held her fingers over red-hot coals and burned them." - -"I don't believe children dared to turn round or whisper in school very -often," said Joe. - -"I should say not. If they did, a sudden rap came upon their heads. It -made them wish they had not broken the rules." - -"I am glad I am alive now, and have such a lovely home, and father and -mother, and—" - -"Uncle Sam," said Joe, ending the sentence for his sister. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -ROGER WILLIAMS - - -It was snowing hard outside and the wind howled around the little -cottage. - -Joe and Lucy had been taking supper with Uncle Sam. Lucy had made a big -pile of buttered toast and her mother had sent over a plum cake. They -were all eaten. - -"You must go home pretty soon, children. The snow is drifting a good -deal and it will be hard walking. It is well that you both wore rubber -boots." - -Uncle Sam got up and went to the window. - -"It was in just such weather that Roger Williams made his way through -the wilderness," he said as he looked out over the fields. - -"I never heard of him before," said Joe. - -"Then it is time you did. It is not a very long story. I don't believe -it will do you any harm to stay long enough to hear it. So here it is: - -"Roger Williams was one of the noblest men who lived among the -Puritans of long ago. He was a young minister. He had fine thoughts of -his own. He did not need to have anyone else do his thinking for him. - -"When he first came to America with his young wife he settled in -Boston. He afterwards went to Salem. He preached in a little church -there. He said so many good things that people liked to hear him. - -"After a while the Puritans began to open their ears and their eyes, -too. The leading men said: - -"'This man does not think just as we do. He must be wrong.' - -"They were very angry. You remember what I told you the other day about -the Puritans?" - -"They wished everyone else to believe just as they did," answered Joe. - -"And were very strict and solemn," added Lucy. - -"You must remember another thing, too. The leading men of the church -made all the laws for the town. Roger Williams did not think this was -right. He was a minister himself, yet he believed the church should -have nothing to do with governing the town. - -"Besides that, he thought, 'the King of England has no right to give -the land in America to the people who come here. The Indians hold the -land. It is theirs. They are the only ones who should sell it or give -it away.' - -"'Dreadful! dreadful!' said the people of Salem. 'Roger Williams cannot -be true to the king if he believes like that.' - -"The leading men made it so unpleasant for the young minister that he -left Salem. He went to Plymouth and stayed among the Pilgrims for two -years. At the end of that time he went back to Salem. He preached good -sermons and the people said: - -"'He has grown more careful in the use of his tongue. He does not say -unwise things any more.' - -"Yet Roger Williams had not changed his mind. He believed just as he -did before and he could not help showing it. - -"'This man is not safe. He puts wrong thoughts into the minds of the -people,' said some of the leaders. 'We must send him back to England.' - -"Roger Williams heard what they intended to do. He fled into the -forests. It was very cold and heavy snow had fallen. Who would be his -friend and help him in his troubles now? - -"Who indeed but his old friend Massasoit! The Indians loved Williams. -He had always been kind and gentle with them. He had been honest in all -his dealings. - -"Massasoit was glad to give Williams a home. He stayed with the Indian -chief for some time. He was busy thinking what he should do. Where -should he make a home for himself and those who believed as he did? - -"'I will give you some land on the shores of a river,' Massasoit told -him. - -"As soon as the spring came Williams went to this place. He set to work -at once to build himself a log house. Five of his friends came from -Salem to be with him. - -"They had not worked very long before they found they would be safer to -move to the other side of the river. Then they would be sure of a place -where the white men could not trouble them. - -"They came to a wild and beautiful spot. The trees of the forest grew -all about it. The river flowed close by. - -"The axes were soon swinging merrily and the tall trees came falling to -the earth. It was the beginning of the city of Providence. - -"Roger Williams gave it that name. He said: 'God has provided a home in -the wilderness for me.' - -"Not long after this a little son was born to him. He, too, was named -Providence. And when a baby daughter came to the happy family, she was -called Mercy. In this way the good minister showed that he did not -forget the loving care of his Heavenly Father. - -"Do not forget Roger Williams," Uncle Sam ended as the children began -to put on their rubber boots. "He dared to say what he thought was -right when almost everyone was against him. - -"Be sure to remember this, too: He had no trouble with the Indians, -because he treated them fairly. They lived in America before the white -people came, so he thought they had a better right to the land than -anyone else." - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -THE FATHER OF WATERS - - -"Look, Uncle Sam! See my lovely new muff. I wanted one ever so much. -My hands get cold, even in my woolen mittens. Father bought it for a -birthday present. He got home from Canada to-day." - -"What did he bring you, Joe?" Uncle Sam asked after he had admired -Lucy's muff. - -"A fur cap. It is a perfect beauty." - -"Father says Canada is a great place for hunters, there are so many -wild animals in the forests. He was dreadfully cold while he was there. -He is glad to be home again." - -"Yes, the weather is colder there than it is here, because it is -farther north. Yet the cold did not keep the Frenchmen from going to -live in Canada long ago. They were willing to suffer a little so long -as they could get rich by hunting and trapping, and trading with the -Indians. - -"They were the first white people to settle in Canada. They called the -country 'New France.' - -"They built stations here and there along the shores of the St. -Lawrence River. The Indians used to bring loads of furs to sell to -them. The white men paid for the furs with hatchets, and beads, and -pieces of cloth. That was the kind of money the Indians liked best. - -"The savages of Canada were always friendly to the Frenchmen. They -found that the settlers did not wish to harm them and that they were -treated fairly. So there was no trouble. - -"The Frenchmen loaded ships with the furs they bought and sent them -home to France. They wrote to their friends in the old country about -the gentle and friendly Indians. Some good French priests heard the -news. They said: - -"'We will cross the ocean and go to live among the Indians. We will -teach them about God and about Christ, the Savior.'" - -Uncle Sam was so busy talking, he did not notice Joe making signs to -his sister. These signs said: "We had better take off our coats and -spend the evening. I know Uncle Sam feels like telling a story." - -[Illustration: FUR-TRADING WITH THE FRENCH] - -Lucy understood her brother. In another minute she and Joe were -sitting on either side of the old man as he began to tell of the good -priest Father Marquette and what he found. - -It was a long time ago that Father Marquette left France and came to -Canada. Unlike the fur traders, he had no wish to get rich. He was a -priest with a kind, loving heart. He cared only to teach and help the -Indians. - -As soon as he reached Canada, he asked many questions about the Red -Men. The fur traders told him of some Indians who lived not far away. -They said: - -"These Indians are kind and honest. They will treat you well." - -Marquette went to see them at once. They liked him because he was -gentle and good. They took him into their homes. He lived with them for -three years. - -While he was there, he heard of a wonderful river. The Indians called -it "The Father of Waters" because it was so long and wide. They said -it was far, very far, to the west of them. Other Indians had told them -about it. They thought it would not be safe to sail down this river. -Tribes of fierce savages lived on its shores. They would kill anyone -who came among them. - -The good Marquette was not afraid. He only thought: "These savage -Indians have all the more need of my teaching. I must go to them." - -A fur trader named Joliet, and five other men, went with the priest. -They traveled in canoes made of birch bark. On they went, and still on. -Many days passed by. No Indians were seen as yet. - -At last, they saw huts along the shore. These must be the homes of the -Red Men. In another minute they heard cries of welcome. The Indians -came hurrying to meet their visitors. They had heard of the good -Marquette from their friends to the eastward. - -They asked him to stay with them. They begged him to go no farther or -he would surely come to harm. They repeated the stories he had already -heard,—the stories of fierce Red Men and of wicked demons which would -destroy him. Still Marquette did not fear. He must not stop yet. He and -Joliet started out once more. - -They traveled for many days before they reached the great Father of -Waters. At last it met their eyes. How different it was from the river -on which they had been traveling! The waters rushed along, making a -mighty noise. It was a wonder their little canoe could be kept upright. - -The travelers now saw a path leading down to the shore. It must be an -Indian trail. They left the canoe and followed the trail. They came to -an Indian village. Its people were afraid of the white men and ran to -hide behind the trees. - -Some of their chiefs were braver than the others and came out to meet -Marquette. They held out the pipe of peace to him and his friend. When -the white men had smoked it and handed it back, they knew there was -nothing to fear. - -When the good priest asked about the great river, the Indians told the -same old story he had heard so many times before. - -"You must go no farther. There are very bad Red Men and many frightful -monsters to the southward. They will kill you and eat you if you go -among them." - -Marquette and Joliet paid no heed to these words. Before they went on -their journey, however, they sat down to a great feast which the women -had prepared for them. A dish of mush came first. The Indians fed it -to the white men with big wooden spoons. Broiled fish came next, but -before it was offered to the visitors the bones were carefully taken -out. After this a roasted dog was proudly set before them. It was a -great dainty to the Red Men, but Marquette and Joliet would not taste -it. - -"It is very queer," thought the Indians. They could not understand how -anyone should refuse to eat roast dog. - -As soon as the feast was over, Marquette asked the Great Spirit to -bless these kind Indians. Then he bade them good-bye and paddled away -in his canoe. - -The river grew wider and wider. Herds of buffaloes were feeding along -its shores. Some of them stopped feeding long enough to look at the two -white men as they paddled past them. - -The daring travelers now came to a place where high rocks reached up -from the banks. Strange figures were carved on the rocks. They were -painted in fearful colors. They had red eyes and long beards. They -had bodies like fishes. They were ugly to look at. These must be the -monsters the white men had heard so much about. - -They were only pictures of monsters, however, and not real ones. Yet -the Indians all along the river were afraid of them. Whenever the -Red Men had to pass the place, they offered prayers to these hideous -figures. - -On went the white men, and still on. The river was growing wider all -the time. - -At last they came to a place where the Indians were savage and -unfriendly. The travelers learned that cruel Spaniards were not far -away. After Ponce de Leon discovered Florida the Spaniards had claimed -that country. They settled there as well as in other parts of the -south. They had some villages near the lower part of the Mississippi. -Savage Indians and cruel Spaniards together made the danger too great -for the travelers. - -"We should only be made prisoners. Then we could not go back and tell -our friends about the wonderful river." That is what the good priest -said to his friend. - -It was too bad, for they were told it would take only five days more to -reach the mouth of the river. They had made a wonderful voyage already, -so they turned about and started homeward. - -Storms and cold weather now troubled them. They were weak and half -sick long before home was in sight. The gentle priest was at last too -ill to travel any farther. He stopped with some friendly Indians while -Joliet went on to Canada. - -Everyone was filled with delight on hearing about the great river. "It -will belong to France, because Frenchmen have discovered it," they said. - -Cannons were fired and bells were rung in the city. It was a time of -gladness. - -Poor Father Marquette was sick for a whole year. Indeed, he was never -entirely well afterwards. He stayed among his Indian friends and taught -them till he died. They loved him very much and waited upon the sick -priest with the most tender care. - -"But this is not the whole story of 'The Father of Waters,'" said Uncle -Sam when he came to the death of Marquette. "There was another brave -Frenchman who followed in the path of the priest. I know you will like -to hear about him." - -The children nodded their heads and Uncle Sam began - - -THE STORY OF LA SALLE - -Once upon a time there was a brave young man named Robert La Salle. He -lived in France. He was always ready for some new adventure. While he -was still young he thought: - -"I will join my countrymen in Canada and see something of their strange -life among the Indians." - -He was soon busy among the fur traders along the St. Lawrence River and -the great lakes. A piece of land was given to him and he began to build -a fort. He was proud that the French people held Canada. He wished to -do his part in making it strong so that all enemies could be kept out. - -Joliet came back from his long journey. He told of the great -Mississippi River. La Salle was much excited over the news. - -La Salle said, "Our people must not only claim this river, but we must -also build forts and stations along its shores. Then we can keep off -the English and Spaniards." - -His friends in Canada thought La Salle was the very one to go back to -France and tell the king about Marquette's wonderful trip. He went to -his own country as soon as possible and stood before his ruler. - -He painted a fine word-picture of what could be done. The Englishmen -and Spaniards had been satisfied to live near the eastern and southern -shores of America. They might not always stay there. Now was the chance -for the French to enter the heart of the country and make it their -very own. - -The king was delighted at what he heard. He praised La Salle and told -the young Frenchman to go back to Canada and work out his plans. - -La Salle lost no time in obeying the king. As soon as he arrived on the -St. Lawrence he went to one of the lakes and began to build a boat. He -thought: - -"Canoes are not strong enough for the great work before me. I must sail -as far as possible along the chain of great lakes. Then I shall not be -far from 'The Father of Waters'." - -He and his men worked hard. It was not long before the boat was ready -to launch. It seemed very large to the Indians who came to see it start -on its first voyage. Never before had such a large boat sailed on the -lakes. - -La Salle had to make his way very carefully, for he knew nothing about -these strange waters. He sailed through one great lake and passed -safely into the next one. Everything went well. Wherever La Salle -stopped, he met friendly Indians. They were ready to trust their -visitors, for Marquette had been among them. How good he had been! How -tenderly they had loved him! All other white men must be good, too. -This was what the Indians thought. - -The vessel soon reached Green Bay, where Marquette had spent a year -among the Red Men. - -The Indians had many rich and beautiful furs which they were ready to -sell. La Salle ordered his men to load the vessel with these furs as -quickly as possible. Then they were to sail back to Canada and unload -them. He and a few others would go on their way in canoes. - -Alas! nothing happened as La Salle had hoped. A terrible storm arose -soon after the vessel started back. The winds swept over the lake and -the little canoes drifted now one way, and now another. Every moment it -seemed as though people and boats must be destroyed. - -After four days, however, the storm went down and the men reached the -shore. They were faint from need of food and wet from head to foot. No -Indians were to be seen and they could find nothing to eat. As soon as -they had dried themselves, they started on again. They hoped to find a -village not far away where they could get food. - -The poor tired men paddled on for some time more but no signs of Red -Men nor of their huts could be seen. - -"We will land and look about us," they said at last. The canoes were -hauled up on the shore while La Salle and his men searched around. - -"Here are corn caves!" some one cried in delight. - -Sure enough, stores of corn were hidden away among the rocks. The -hungry men helped themselves to the grain and made their way back to -their camp. They were careful to leave presents near the caves. They -would not think of stealing the corn. The Red Men must be paid for it. - -A fire was soon blazing. The corn was ground and cooked and they all -sat down to eat. Suddenly they heard a noise and two Indians appeared. -The Red Men held up the beads and cloth that the white men had left as -pay for the corn. They were as happy over their presents as children -are after Santa Claus has paid them a visit. - -It was surely time now for the vessel to return. La Salle watched for -it in vain. It was never heard of again. It must have been wrecked in -the terrible storm. - -After many days of waiting, the men begged to turn back toward home. -They were such a small company! There were so many dangers around -them, and the ship would never come to their help. - -Go back! La Salle could not think of such a thing. He told his men they -should set to work at once to build a fort. They had little courage, -but they did as he ordered. - -As soon as they had finished Fort Break-Heart, as they called it -because they were so sad and discouraged, a few men were left to hold -it. The rest of the party went on their way into the wild west. - -When they came to another good stopping place, the men built another -fort. It was hard work, for they were sick and lonely. - -"It is of no use to go any further now," thought La Salle. "Ice and -snow are around us. The food is scarce. Nothing can be done till spring -comes again. I will divide our small party into two parts. Some of the -men must stay here to hold the fort. The rest of us will make our way -back to Canada to get provisions." - -It was a hard journey. The lakes and rivers were caked with ice. The -ground was covered with snow. The brave La Salle and his men suffered -from cold and wet and hunger before they reached a place where white -men were living. - -They told their story, got fresh stores, and once more started off. La -Salle did not know the word "Fail." - -Sometimes he and his men paddled along in their birch canoes. Sometimes -they lifted their boats upon their shoulders and made their way through -the woods. - -Danger was around them everywhere. Wild animals roamed through the -forest. Unfriendly Indians might take them by surprise at any moment. -There were no roads,—no paths even. One thought filled the mind of La -Salle: - -"I must find the Mississippi. I must travel to its very mouth. That is -the only way by which France can claim all the country on its shores." - -When the returning party reached Fort Break-Heart, they found it torn -down. Their friends were not there. They thought those left to guard it -must have been killed or made prisoners by the Indians. - -It was of no use to stop. They pushed on with sad hearts. - -At last they had their reward. The great Mississippi lay before them. -La Salle's heart was full of hope as the canoes were launched upon its -waters. - -On and on he paddled as Marquette had done before him. He passed tribes -of friendly Indians. He came to others who were ready to kill the white -men. Still he pushed onward till the waters became salt and rushed -outward to the Gulf of Mexico. The Frenchmen had at last reached the -mouth of the great river. - -Now came the homeward journey and the joy of telling the good news to -the people in Canada. - -La Salle did not rest even now. The king of France must hear what he -had done. He made haste to sail across the ocean to his own country. - -The king said that ships must be made ready at once. A large party of -people should go to the mouth of the river. They must build a fort and -settle there and take the country in the name of France. La Salle was, -of course, chosen to go with them. - -They did not go by the way of Canada. They went as straight as possible -to the Gulf of Mexico. La Salle thought it would not be hard to find -the mouth of the river. - -The voyage across the Atlantic was safely made. The ships entered the -Gulf of Mexico and sailed along its shores. But La Salle could not find -the entrance of the Mississippi. He searched long and carefully. Many -times he thought it was in sight. Many times he was disappointed. - -The food became scarce. One of the ships was wrecked. The men said: - -"We had better give up the search and go back to France." - -La Salle was left with a few men on the shore of Texas. He still had -hopes of finding the mouth of the river. - -He wandered about for some time. Even now he was not willing to give up. - -One day a very sad thing happened. The brave leader, La Salle, was -killed. And he was not killed by the savages, but by one of his own -men. They were angry because he had brought them there. This was the -only reason they had for doing such a mean and cruel deed. - -Such was the end of Robert La Salle. - -He did not do all he had hoped to do. Yet he led the way for other -Frenchmen, who afterwards settled along the banks of the Mississippi. - -"The story has a very sad ending," said Lucy, when Uncle Sam had -finished. "I don't like to have a story stop at such a sad place." - -"I think it is one of the very best you have told us," said Joe. "I -wish I could have been with La Salle a part of the time. It must have -been exciting, paddling through a strange country and sleeping at night -by the side of a big camp-fire." - -"I don't think you would have slept much at first, with wolves howling -and wildcats screeching not far away," replied Uncle Sam. "Then how -would you have enjoyed going without food for days together and having -your clothes soaked through in the heavy rains?" - -Even this unpleasant picture did not seem to frighten Joe. He was a -"regular boy," as his mother said. - -"If you are going to have adventures, you must take good and bad things -together as they come," he said. - -Uncle Sam was pleased with the answer. - -"That is true, my dear, but remember one thing: No one should risk his -life just for the sake of adventure alone. Yet, if he is trying to do -some great and useful thing, as La Salle did, and cannot help meeting -dangers, he should be praised for meeting them bravely and with a stout -and trusting heart." - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -THE STORY OF A YOUNG QUAKER - - -"I am so glad to see you again, Uncle Sam. It seems as though we had -been away a whole year, yet it is not four weeks." - -Lucy talked very fast. Her cheeks were red as roses and her lips were -bright with excitement. - -"Only four weeks! Yes, that is all, but it has been a long time to me," -said Uncle Sam, as he bent down to take Lucy in his arms. - -"You don't know how I have missed you children," he added. "I have been -a lonesome old man without you." - -"We have ever so much to tell you," said Joe, who had followed Lucy. -"You know, this was our first visit to Philadelphia. We had never seen -our great-aunt before, either. She has lived there ever since she was a -young girl." - -"She was so good, we began to love her at once," Lucy went on. "She has -a soft voice and she wears a gray dress and a white kerchief around -her neck all the time. When she spoke to me, she always said thee or -thou instead of you." - -"That was because she is a Quaker," Joe broke in. - -"I used to know your Aunt Rachel," said Uncle Sam. "It was a long time -ago, though. Now go on and tell me all about your visit." - -The children had never heard that Uncle Sam had once loved their Aunt -Rachel very dearly. Everyone thought they would be married. Then she -went from home on a visit. While she was away she met a young Quaker -who soon became her husband. - -Perhaps Uncle Sam never got over his love for the children's aunt. -Anyway, he never married. - -"There are not very many Quakers in the country now," said the old man -as the children finished telling him about their visit. "There was a -time when they were glad to come to America. It was the only way they -could have peace. Would you like to hear about it?" - -"Of course, Uncle Sam. We are so tired from our long journey we can -hardly move. Nothing would be nicer than to sit by your side and listen -to a story," said Joe. - -Lucy showed she thought so, too, by pressing Uncle Sam's hand and -looking up at him with a pleased nod of her little head. - -Uncle Sam smiled and began the story of - - -WILLIAM PENN THE QUAKER - -A long time ago there was a rich man who lived in England. He was an -admiral in the English navy and a great friend of the king. - -Admiral Penn had a son named William who was bright and handsome. The -boy had kind parents, a lovely home, and plenty of money to spend. The -family was a very happy one until William went away to college. It was -then that he first went to a meeting of the Quakers. He liked what he -heard, and he thought: - -"I, too, would like to be a Quaker." - -The Quakers believed quite differently from other people in England. -They were like the Pilgrims in one thing,—they would not go to the -regular church of the country, but had a different service among -themselves. They thought everyone should be free to worship God in -his own manner. They were quite different from the Pilgrims in other -ways, however. They thought it was wrong to fight, even to save their -country. - -"One man should not take up arms against another," they said. They -believed it was not right to dress in gay colors. They said it makes -people proud and vain. - -They spoke to each other simply, and used the words thee and thou -instead of you, after the manner of the Bible. They called themselves -"Friends," not "Quakers." The word "Quaker" was at first a "nickname," -but is what they are now generally called. - -It seems strange that a rich young man, brought up as was William Penn, -should care to join the Quakers. - -He did care, however. He cared so much that he did not change his mind -even when he was driven from his college because of what he believed. - -His father was very angry when he learned that his loved son had joined -with people who were despised by nearly everyone else. How Penn's -mother must have wept and pleaded with him! - -It made no difference, however. The young man had made up his mind what -was right. He could not change his belief, even to please his parents. - -When his father saw that words were of no use, he told William to leave -England and travel about in Europe. He gave him plenty of money with -which he could enjoy himself. Admiral Penn thought his son might forget -the Quakers while visiting other cities and having a good time. - -It was not so, however. Soon after William Penn came home, he was sent -to Ireland on business. While he was there he went to several Quaker -meetings. He was arrested and put in prison because he was found in -these places. It was against the law for the Friends to hold meetings -or to attend them. - -When Penn was free once more, his father sent for him to come home. He -said: - -"I will forgive you everything if you will promise to do three things: -Take off your hat to the King, the King's brother, and to myself, your -father." - -William Penn said he would think about it. He could not promise at -once, for the Friends did not think it right to take off one's hat to -certain people; all persons should be treated with the same honor. - -After a while the young man came to his father and said: - -"I cannot do as you wish." - -His father was so angry that he turned his son out of doors. Young Penn -would have had a sad time if his mother had not sent him money to keep -him from want. - -He began to preach in the streets of the city. He hoped other people -would listen to him and also become Quakers. It was not long before he -was arrested again. He was put in the Tower of London for breaking the -law. His cell in the Tower was a dark and dreadful place. - -The king's brother was a great friend of William Penn. He tried hard to -have the young man set free. At last he brought it about. - -Penn's father died soon after his son came out of prison. William was -now a rich man. He went again and again to the king, begging that -Quakers should not be whipped or put in prison. - -At last he spoke of money which the king had owed his father. He said: - -"You need not pay this money back to me if you will give me land in -America where the Quakers can have a free and happy home." - -The king was willing to do this, for he owed a good deal of money and -found it hard to pay his debts. - -The poor Quakers were allowed to come out of prison and seek a home -across the ocean. They called the country that the king had given -Penn, Pennsylvania, which means Penn's woods. - -It could have had no better name. The country was covered with thick -woods, and the settlers had gained it through the kindness of William -Penn. - -He came to Pennsylvania the year after the first settlers reached it. -He did not try to rule over his people. He said they should make their -own laws. He told them he wished the new home to be free to all. It did -not matter what a person believed. He should live in Pennsylvania in -peace and happiness. - -He helped the Friends to lay out a city which they called Philadelphia. -That meant the city of Brotherly Love. - -They had no trouble with the Indians. Penn sent word to the near-by -tribes that he wished to meet their chiefs. He said he meant no harm -to them. He would punish anyone who did a wrong to an Indian. He was -willing to pay them for the land where his people had settled. - -One by one the chiefs arrived. They were all well armed and grand with -paint and feathers. They sat in a half-moon under a large elm tree. -Penn stood in their midst. He had no weapons whatever. The branches of -the tall elm tree waved gently overhead while the Quaker talked with -the Red Men and smoked the peace-pipe with them. He said: - -"I will not call you my children, because fathers sometimes whip -their children. I will not call you brothers, because brothers -sometimes quarrel. But I will call you the same as we say of the white -people,—Friends." - -He told them he and his people would treat them honestly. They wished -for peace always, and would do nothing to break it. - -Before the meeting was over, the Indians promised to keep that peace -and to harm no Quaker. They gave Penn a belt of wampum. Wampum was very -precious to the Indians. It was made of peculiar shells. Penn's belt -was made of white ones. It had a picture in the middle made with purple -shells. This picture showed a white man and an Indian shaking hands. - -The Red Men kept their promise. When they became old and ready to die, -they repeated it to their children, who also promised. Thus the Friends -lived in peace with the Indians, and Pennsylvania was the happy home of -many people. - -Penn stayed a long time with his settlers. He often went to visit the -Indians in their villages. He joined them in their feasts. He played -with their children. The Red Men loved and trusted him. - -When years passed by and the white men in other places had bloody wars -with the Indians, the Quakers among them were not harmed. The white -feather of peace was placed over the door of every house where Quakers -were living. That was the Red Man's sign for these words: - -"No one here must meet with any harm. The Red Man is his friend." - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -LORD BALTIMORE AND THE CATHOLICS - - -"There are three churches in our village. Look, Uncle Sam, we can see -the spires of all of them lighted by the sunset." - -"The sun does not have any favorites," was the reply. "He treats all -alike." - -"Let me see. One is the Methodist, another the Congregational, and the -third is the Catholic church," Joe went on. - -"They have different names, yet they were all built for one use,—the -worship of God." - -Uncle Sam spoke softly as he looked from Joe to his sister. - -"The _name_ of the church does not matter so much, so long as people -seek it for the right reason," he went on. "There was a time when -people were not free to choose their church. You remember the Pilgrims -and the Quakers, and how much trouble they had. - -"Then there were the Catholics. They could not be happy in England any -more than the Pilgrims. They heard stories of the great land across -the ocean. They envied the free life of the Pilgrims and they thought: - -"'Why should not we, too, find such a home?' - -"Lord Baltimore was one of their leading men. The king was very fond -of him. When he asked that Catholics might seek a home in America with -him, the king was quite willing. He told Lord Baltimore they might go -with him to Newfoundland. More than that! Lord Baltimore should rule -over them with as much power as a king. He should make the laws and -punish people who did wrong. He need not ask the king about anything he -wanted to do. - -"'Newfoundland is a beautiful country,' said the Catholics. 'At least -that is what we have been told by the sea-captains who have been there.' - -"One of these captains had visited Newfoundland in the summer time. He -wrote a book about the place. He told of the berries and roses, the -birds, and the pleasant weather. He did not know that winters on the -island are long and cold. - -"Lord Baltimore and his party went to Newfoundland with hearts full of -hope. Alas! at the end of the first winter they said: - -"'We cannot make our home here. We suffer too much from the cold and -bad weather.' - -"It is no wonder they felt so. Ten of their people had died. Many -others had been sick. Lord Baltimore himself was one of these last. - -"He wrote a letter to the king telling of his troubles. He now asked -for land in Virginia. Then he bade good-bye to Newfoundland and sailed -south. He wished to find out if Virginia was as good a country as he -had been told it was. - -"He was not disappointed this time. It was all he had hoped. - -"When the people of Virginia heard that Catholics wished to settle -among them, they sent word to the king of England that they did not -like the plan at all. Then the king said: - -"'I will give the land north of Virginia to Lord Baltimore.' - -"When the second party was ready to leave England, their good friend -was dead. His son took his place as governor. - -"'How beautiful this place is!' thought the travelers as they sailed up -the Potomac River after a long and dangerous voyage. - -"'You should call the country I have given you Maryland, or the Land -of Mary,' the king had told them. This was in honor of the Queen -Henrietta Maria. - -"It was because of this that their new home was called Maryland. - -"The party landed first on an island. A large cross was set up in the -ground and the priests gave thanks to God for bringing them all safely -across the ocean. - -"As they sailed up the river, they saw Indians along the shores. The -Red Men did not look kindly at the strangers. They seemed ready to make -war. The governor thought: - -"'This will never do. We must not fight if we can help it. We must show -the savages that we wish to be friends.' - -"He acted so wisely that fear and anger left the hearts of the savages. -They put their bows and arrows aside and began to help the newcomers. - -"One day as some of the settlers were out on an excursion, a stranger -appeared among them. His skin was so dark, and he was dressed so -strangely, they thought at first that he was an Indian. - -"He spoke to them in English, however, and explained who he was. His -name was Captain Henry Fleet. He had been living among the Red Men. -He had once been their prisoner. He gave the strangers good advice. He -said to them: - -"'Do not settle on the island where you are now living. I know another -place you would like much better. It is on the shore of the main land. -Some Indians have a village there. They are kind and gentle. I think -they will be willing to sell their home to you.' - -"It was a good plan. The white people went to the place and were much -pleased with it. It was in a lovely valley near the shore. Springs of -cool water bubbled up here and there. Groves of nut and oak trees gave -a pleasant shade. No fierce wild animals roamed through the forest near -by. They must find out at once if the Indians would be willing to sell -such a pleasant home. - -"They brought cloth, tools, and beads to the Red Men. They said: - -"'We will give you all these things in return for your village place.' - -"The eyes of the Indians sparkled with delight. Cloth, tools, and beads -were the very things they most wished for. They were quite ready to -move away if they could have all these. They said to the strangers: - -"'We will share our village with you till the harvest is ripe. Then we -will gather it and go somewhere else and leave you here alone.' - -"Everyone was pleased and the white people settled themselves in the -huts of the Indians. All lived together in happiness till the season -came to an end. Then the Indians moved away, but they showed themselves -kind neighbors ever after. - -"The white men built houses and planted gardens. They were more happy -and comfortable than they had ever been before in their lives. - -"They went back and forth among their savage neighbors without fear. -Their priests taught the red children and baptized many of them. One -of the Indian chiefs trusted the white people so much that he sent his -little daughter to live with them. He said: - -"'When I am dead she will rule over my people. She will be a wiser -ruler if she is brought up by the white men. They will teach her many -things she cannot learn in our village.' - -"So it happened one bright morning that the little Indian maiden left -her home in the forest. She sprang into her light canoe and paddled -down the river. She soon came to the English village. - -"The white people were very kind. Yet how strange their ways must have -seemed to her! - -"She took off the soft moccasins in which she could run so easily. She -put on leather shoes such as the English children wore. They must have -seemed very stiff and uncomfortable at first. - -"Her dress of beaver-skin and the pretty feather mantle, of which she -was so proud, were laid aside. She must now wear skirts and waists, -like the other girls around her. - -"Now, too, she must spend a large part of each day in the house, for -she had to study lessons in books. She must also learn to cook and sew -and knit. - -"Poor little Indian girl! How different all this was from her old free -life in the forest. Then the birds and bees, the rabbits and squirrels, -were around her from morning until night. No hat of any kind kept the -soft breezes from blowing through her hair." - -"She must have been very homesick," said Lucy, when Uncle Sam reached -this part of the story. "I shouldn't wonder if she cried herself to -sleep every night." - -"It is not Indian fashion to cry," replied Uncle Sam. "The Red Men are -ashamed to let tears come to their eyes. Even the little children are -taught not to show in their faces what they feel. - -"This little girl may have been very unhappy at first. I really don't -know about that. At any rate, she lived among the white people till she -grew up. Then she married a white man, just as Pocahontas did." - -Uncle Sam stopped for a moment and began to stroke his chin. That was -the sign that he was thinking. - -Lucy began to pet Buzz, who had just waked up from a nap at her feet. -She was thinking, too. It seemed as though she could see that little -Indian girl of long ago. The child was in a birch canoe and gliding -down the river. Her bright black eyes were turned longingly toward her -home in the forest. Those eyes seemed to say: - -"Good-bye, dear, happy days of freedom. Good-bye." - -Joe sat thinking, too. He was wondering if the Indian girl went back to -her people with her white husband, and if she was a good ruler after -her father died. - -"A penny for your thoughts!" said Uncle Sam suddenly. He spoke to Joe. - -"I can't imagine that Indian princess ruling her people after the white -man's fashion. I do not believe it would have suited the Indians." The -boy spoke slowly. - -"I think you are right, Joe," Uncle Sam answered. "But I believe she -did not have a chance to try. The Indians were not willing to let a -woman take the old chief's place. They chose his brother, I believe. - -"Now I will tell you what I was thinking of myself. When I spoke of -Pocahontas, I went on to think of the people of Virginia. You might say -they lived next door to Maryland. They had a great deal of trouble with -the Indians, while their neighbors in Maryland did not have any. - -"The people of Maryland lived in peace and let others come to settle -among them. It did not matter whether these newcomers were Catholics -like themselves, or Quakers, or Puritans. Anyone who wished was allowed -to live with them and believe as he liked. - -"The only trouble they did have was with Virginia. It was about an -island in the river. Both colonies claimed that island. They even had -battles with each other before the trouble was settled. Maryland was -not much to blame, however. Her people always seemed to wish for peace. - -"A happier colony never settled in America than the Catholics who came -to Maryland because of their kind friend Lord Baltimore." - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -THE POOR DEBTORS - - -"This is the last chance for a story for a long time and I am sorry," -said Joe. - -Lucy looked sad too. She was sorry to have Uncle Sam go away. - -"We shall miss the nice stories, but we shall miss you even more than -the stories," she said, putting her arms around her old friend's neck. - -Uncle Sam had been called to New York on business. He might be gone two -months. It might even be a longer time than that. He could not tell. He -looked from one child to the other with a face beaming with love. - -"One more story. Yes, that is all. Then you children will have time to -think over what I have told you. And when I come back you will be ready -to hear some more. It is a good thing, after all, for me to go away and -give you a rest. - -"You see, children, I get wound up just like a clock. If I once get to -going, I can't stop unless something makes me." - -"Give us a rest, indeed!" cried Joe. "Lucy and I are not babies. We -like stories that mean something, now that we are nine years old. -Besides, you could not tire us anyway, Uncle Sam." - -The old man looked pleased. - -"Well, well, I am glad to hear it. But it is almost dark already. I -will begin at once with the story I promised for this evening. - -"It is about some poor people in England who were shut up in prisons. -They were not wicked. They had not stolen nor done any other dreadful -deed. Yet the prison doors were tightly locked upon them and they were -shut out from the beauty of this great world. - -"You shall hear why these people were not free. They owed money and -were not able to pay it back. In the old days in England there were -many poor people. It was hard to earn a living. Some of those who tried -the hardest, could get no work. Then, of course, they did not have -money. Yet they needed food and clothing for their families the same as -ever. They could not let them starve. - -"It is no wonder they got into debt. If the debt was not soon paid, -they were taken from their homes. 'Stay in prison till you pay what -you owe.' This was the cruel law." - -"But how _could_ they earn any money while they were in prison?" cried -Joe. - -"It was impossible, of course. That is why the law was such a bad one. -By and by a very good man went to visit the prisons. His name was James -Oglethorpe. - -"He saw the poor debtors and pitied their sad case. He wished to help -them. He thought of America. It had already given homes to many unhappy -people. He went to the king of England and said: - -"'Will you let the debtors come out of prison and go with me to -America? They can have a fresh start and make a new home for themselves -there. You will then have no more trouble with them.' - -"The king listened kindly to Oglethorpe's plan. It seemed a good one. -He promised to give land in America to these people and said that -Oglethorpe should be their governor. - -"Not long afterwards, the debtors were set free. How glad they were to -be with their own families once more! How thankful they must have been -to James Oglethorpe who had done so much for them! - -"When they left England for America, their good friend went too, so -that he might give them his wise help. Their new home was farther south -than that of any other English people in this country at that time. It -lay next to Florida. The Spaniards were their neighbors. - -"The new colony was given the name of Georgia, in honor of George, the -king of England. - -"The first day in the new home was given up to prayer. All gave thanks -to God for bringing them here in safety. Then came weeks of good hard -work. Houses were built, a wall was made around the village, and a fort -stood ready in case of an attack by enemies, red or white. - -"General Oglethorpe was a wise governor. He made just laws for his -people. He drilled the men every day in order to make them good -soldiers in case they needed to fight. - -"He treated the Indians so kindly they did not wish to make war upon -his people. There was one chief whose name was Tomachichi. He loved -General Oglethorpe very dearly. One day he brought a present for the -governor. It was the skin of a buffalo with the feathers of an eagle -painted on it. - -"Tomachichi said: 'The skin of the buffalo is warm. The feathers of the -eagle are soft. These things therefore mean love and protection. The -English are swift as the eagle and strong as the buffalo.' - -"Tomachichi afterwards visited England with General Oglethorpe. His -wife and nephew went with him. How strange the crowded streets and -large buildings of London must have seemed to these savages! - -"Soon after Oglethorpe settled in Georgia, he invited the chiefs of -the near-by Indian tribes to meet together with him. At this meeting -he asked them to keep peace with him and his people. They were quite -willing to do as he asked. - -"Then he gave each one of them a fine coat, a hat trimmed with lace, -and a shirt. They must have felt grand indeed when they put on such -elegant clothes. - -"Oglethorpe noticed many mulberry trees growing in Georgia. He said: - -"'Silkworms feed on mulberry leaves. It would be a good plan for the -next ship that comes from England to bring some silkworms. Then we can -make silk. We can sell it for a good price.' - -"The silkworms were brought and silk was made. It was sent over to -England and the queen herself had a dress made of American silk. She -wore it on the king's birthday. - -"After a while, however, the people gave up raising silkworms in -Georgia. It did not pay. They found they could get more money by -cutting lumber in the forests and trading for furs with the Indians. -They sent these things to other countries and were paid well for them. - -"As long as General Oglethorpe was in Georgia the settlers had two good -laws. He would not allow rum or slaves to be brought into the country. -He was a kind and wise governor in every way. - -"And now, children," said Uncle Sam, "don't you know enough about your -country to think the words of the old song are true? Can you see that -it is really the 'Land of the Free and the home of the Brave?'" - -"Indeed yes, Uncle Sam," cried Joe and Lucy together. - -"There is no country in the wide world like ours," added Joe with a -positive shake of his head. - -"Very well, then. Let's sing 'America' with a heart and a will," said -Uncle Sam. "We can sit right here on the porch while we sing it. We -don't need the organ to help us out." - -The birds had already gone to sleep. But several of them waked up in -the tree-top near by and added a cheerful chirp to the voices of the -three earnest singers. - - -THE END. - - - - -Transcriber's Note - - Obvious typographical errors have been silently corrected. Variations - in hyphenation have been standardised but all other spelling and - punctuation remains unchanged. - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The Coming of the White Men, by Mary Hazelton Wade - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE COMING OF THE WHITE MEN *** - -***** This file should be named 55959-0.txt or 55959-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/9/5/55959/ - -Produced by Larry B. Harrison and The Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/55959-0.zip b/old/55959-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 640012e..0000000 --- a/old/55959-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h.zip b/old/55959-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 195518e..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/55959-h.htm b/old/55959-h/55959-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index ed7c603..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/55959-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6328 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8" /> -<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coming of the White Men: Stories of How Our Country Was Discovered, by Mary Hazelton Wade</title> - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -h1, h2 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; - margin-top: 1em; - margin-bottom: 1em; -} - -h1 {line-height: 1;} - -.half-title { - text-align: center; - font-size: large; -} - -p { - text-indent: 1.75em; - margin-top: .51em; - margin-bottom: .24em; - text-align: justify; -} - -.p1t {margin-top: 1em;} -.p1b {margin-bottom: 1em;} -.p2t {margin-top: 2em;} - -.p1 {margin-top: 1em;} - -.vspace {line-height: 1.5;} - -.in0 {text-indent: 0;} - -.xsmall {font-size: 65%;} -.small {font-size: 80%;} -.large {font-size: 125%;} -.xlarge {font-size: 150%;} - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.bold {font-weight: bold;} - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - right: 4%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - padding: .2% .1%; - color: #acacac; - background: #ffffff; -} - - -/* Simple Drop-caps */ -.drop:first-letter { - float: left; - font-size: 300%; - line-height: 70%; - padding: 2px 8px 0 6px; -} - -.uppercase {text-transform: uppercase;} - -p.drop { text-indent: -6px;} - - -/* Breaks */ -hr { - width: 45%; - margin-top: 4em; - margin-bottom: 4em; - margin-left: 27.5%; - margin-right: 27.5%; - clear: both; -} - - -/* Table */ -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; - min-width: 35%; - max-width: 80%; - border-collapse: collapse; -} - -.tdl { - text-align: left; - vertical-align: top; - padding-right: 1em; - padding-left: 1.5em; - text-indent: -1.5em; - padding-bottom: .75em; -} - -.tdr { - text-align: right; - vertical-align: top; - padding-right: 1em; - padding-left: 1.5em; - text-indent: -1.5em; - padding-bottom: .75em; -} - - -/* Image */ -img { - padding: 0 0 0 0; - max-width: 100%; - height: auto; -} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; - margin-bottom: 1em; - margin-top: 2em; -} - - -/* Caption */ -.caption { - text-align: center; - margin-top: 0; -} - - -/* Transcriber Note */ -.transnote { - background-color: #EEE; - border: thin dotted; - font-family: sans-serif, serif; - color: #000; - margin-left: 5%; - margin-right: 5%; - margin-top: 4em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - padding: 1em; -} - - - -@media screen - -{ - .half-title - { - margin: 6em 0; - } -} - - - -@media print, handheld - -{ - .half-title - { - page-break-before: always; - page-break-after: always; - margin: 0; - padding-top: 6em; - } - - h1, h2, .chapter, .newpage {page-break-before: always;} - - .nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} - - p { - margin-top: .5em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .25em; - } - - table { - width: 100%; - max-width: 100%; - } - - .tdl { - padding-left: 1em; - text-indent: -1em; - padding-right: 0; - } - - .pagenum { - display: none; - page-break-before: avoid; - } - -} - - - -@media handheld - -{ - - body {margin: 0;} - - .transnote { - page-break-inside: avoid; - margin-left: 2%; - margin-right: 2%; - margin-top: 1em; - margin-bottom: 1em; - padding: .5em; - } - - p.drop:first-letter { - float: left; - clear: left - } - - .hideepub {visibility: hidden;} - -} - - </style> - -</head> - -<body> - - -<pre> - -Project Gutenberg's The Coming of the White Men, by Mary Hazelton Wade - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - -Title: The Coming of the White Men - Stories of How Our Country Was Discovered - -Author: Mary Hazelton Wade - -Illustrator: Sears Gallagher - -Release Date: November 13, 2017 [EBook #55959] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE COMING OF THE WHITE MEN *** - - - - -Produced by Larry B. Harrison and The Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - -</pre> - - - - - -<hr /> - -<div class="figcenter newpage hideepub"> - <img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Cover" /> -</div> - - - - -<hr /> - -<div class="figcenter newpage"> - <img src="images/i_title.jpg" alt="Title_Page" /> -</div> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">5</a></span></p> - -<p class="half-title in0">THE COMING OF THE<br /> -WHITE MEN</p> - - - - - -<hr /> - -<div class="figcenter newpage"><a id="frontis"></a> - <img src="images/i_frontis.jpg" alt="Norsemen" /> - <div class="caption"> - <span class="small">THE NORSEMEN</span> - </div> -</div> - - - - -<hr /> - -<h1>THE COMING OF THE<br /> -WHITE MEN<br /> -<span class="vspace"> </span><br /> -<span class="small">Stories of How Our Country was Discovered</span></h1> - -<p class="in0 bold center">BY<br /> -<span class="xlarge">MARY HAZELTON WADE</span><br /> -<span class="smcap">Author of "ten little indians," "ten big indians,"<br /> -"the little cousin series," etc.</span><br /> -<span class="vspace"> </span><br /> -<span class="large">WITH ILLUSTRATIONS BY<br /> -SEARS GALLAGHER</span><br /> -<span class="vspace"> </span><br /> -<span class="large">W. A. WILDE COMPANY</span><br /> -BOSTON     CHICAGO</p> - - - - -<hr /> - -<p class="in0 bold center newpage"><span class="small"><i>Copyright</i>, 1905,</span><br /> -<span class="smcap small">By W. A. Wilde Company</span>.<br /> -<span class="small"><i>All rights reserved.</i></span><br /> -<span class="vspace"> </span><br /> -<span class="smcap">The Coming of the White Men</span></p> - - - - -<hr /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>PREFACE</h2> -</div> - -<p>The true American is happy in the thought that -his country is a great and glorious one. He can -say with his heart as well as his lips, "This is the -land of the Free and the home of the Brave."</p> - -<p>Those who journey far from their native land -and find themselves in foreign countries tell us how -they are stirred and thrilled when by any chance -the stars and stripes of the American flag meet their -view. These stars and stripes stand for the struggles -for freedom, the brave deeds in the cause of right -and justice, the heroism of those who have laid down -their lives that their country should still live, and -the brother-love that binds together all the men, -women, and children who can say, "I am an -American!"</p> - -<p>It is only right that the boys and girls of America, -as soon as they are able to understand, should hear -the stories of those who took the first steps toward -the building of this nation—those who risked life<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">6</a></span> -and fortune and who were willing to face unknown -dangers for the sake of freedom.</p> - -<p>If these boys and girls of America are to grow up -with the earnest desire of keeping the sacred trust -that must descend to them; if they are to keep this -country the land of the free and the home of the -brave; if their aspirations and ideals shall be of the -highest and the purest, so that the powers and -privileges of America shall increase rather than -diminish with the coming years, then let the plant -of patriotism take root early in their hearts that it -may grow with their growth and blossom in perfect -fullness with their maturer years.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">7</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CONTENTS</h2> -</div> - -<table summary="Contents"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr"><span class="xsmall">CHAPTER</span></td> - <td class="tdl"> </td> - <td class="tdr"><span class="small">PAGE</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">I.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Norsemen</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">II.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Genoese Sailor</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_29">29</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">III.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">John Cabot and the Codfish</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_49">49</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">IV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Fountain of Youth</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_58">58</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">V.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Good Knight and the Lost Baby</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_64">64</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">VI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Story of a Daring Man</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_75">75</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">VII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Henry Hudson</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_95">95</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">VIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Pilgrims</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_109">109</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">IX.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Little Pilgrims of Long Ago</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_127">127</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">X.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Roger Williams</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_136">136</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">XI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Father of Waters</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">XII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Story of a Young Quaker</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_158">158</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">XIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Lord Baltimore and the Catholics</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_167">167</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">XIV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Poor Debtors</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_177">177</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">9</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>ILLUSTRATIONS.</h2> -</div> - - -<table summary="Illustrations"> - <tr> - <td class="tdl"> </td> - <td class="tdr" colspan="2"><span class="small">PAGE</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Norsemen</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><i><a href="#frontis">Frontispiece</a></i>  <a href="#Page_18">18</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Columbus and his flag-ship</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The English trading with the Indians</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Dutch children at play</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_102">102</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Fur-trading with the French</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_142">142</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">11</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER I<br /> -<span class="small">THE NORSEMEN</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">His</span> name wasn't Sam and he wasn't their real -uncle, but everybody else called him Uncle -Sam, so Joe and Lucy followed their example.</p> - -<p>He was tall and thin and had a sharp face. A -funny little tuft of hair grew on his chin and when -he was thinking deeply he was fond of stroking -this tuft with his big bony hand.</p> - -<p>His clothes always seemed to be old-fashioned. -When the neighbors were speaking of him they -would sometimes say, "How much he looks like the -newspaper pictures of 'Uncle Sam.'"</p> - -<p>"Whenever I meet him, he somehow makes me -think of America," said Joe's father. "I never -knew anyone who loved his country as dearly as -he does. He is perfectly happy whenever he can -get anyone to listen to stories of our great men -and the things that happened here long ago."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">12</a></span></p> - -<p>It was for these reasons that people began calling -him Uncle Sam before Joe and Lucy were born.</p> - -<p>His real name was Ebenezer Wilkins, but the -children had to stop and think before they could -remember it. He lived in a cosy little cottage at -the end of the village and kept house there all alone -from one year's end to another.</p> - -<p>Everybody loved him. His kind blue eyes looked -tenderly upon each child in the place. If measles -or chicken-pox shut a boy or girl away from playmates, -Uncle Sam was sure to hear of it. Then, -when his day's work was done and he had eaten -his supper of bread and milk, he would visit the -sick child and make him forget his troubles as he -told stories of boys and girls who lived in the early -days of the white people in America.</p> - -<p>Joe and Lucy were twins. Somehow or other -Uncle Sam had grown to love them more than any -other children in the country round. When they -were babies he used to dandle them on his knees. -He taught them to take their first steps alone. He -bought a book of "Mother Goose's Melodies" on -purpose to learn the rhymes and afterwards repeat -them to the listening babies.</p> - -<p>Sometimes he even stayed home from church on<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">13</a></span> -Sunday mornings so as to take care of these twins -and give their father and mother a chance to go -away together.</p> - -<p>"Twins are a great care, a great care," he would -say slowly. But he would add with a twinkle in -his eyes, "They are never too much of a care for -Uncle Sam."</p> - -<p>"He is better than any <i>real</i> uncle in the world," -said Joe, as he and Lucy opened the gate leading -into the old man's garden.</p> - -<p>It was a summer evening and the sun was just -setting. The rows of hollyhocks and marigolds -looked prettier than ever in the sunset light.</p> - -<p>"Uncle Sam loves bright things," said Lucy, looking -at the flowers. "He is always finding something -new to admire. That is why I like to walk -in the woods with him."</p> - -<p>"He shows me many things I should never see -myself," answered Joe.</p> - -<p>By this time the children had reached the door -of the house, and stepped inside. They never -stopped to knock; Uncle Sam would not have -liked it.</p> - -<p>"I've brought you some cookies, Uncle Sam," -said Lucy, handing a covered dish to the old man.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">14</a></span> -"Mother made them this morning. She put raisins -in them because she knew you are fond of fruit -cookies."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam was pleased when he lifted the napkin -and looked at his present.</p> - -<p>"I can make bread and cook meat and potatoes, -but cake is beyond my skill. It takes women-folks -to do such work." The old man laughed softly -as he put the cookies away in the cupboard.</p> - -<p>"It is a lovely evening. Won't you come out on -the porch and tell us stories in the twilight?"</p> - -<p>As Lucy spoke, she reached up and put her arms -around Uncle Sam's neck. He was so tall he had -to bend down to let her do so.</p> - -<p>"I suppose you want me to tell you about Cinderella -for the fiftieth time, or maybe you would -rather hear about Aladdin and his Wonderful -Lamp?"</p> - -<p>"No, Uncle Sam," said Joe before Lucy had a -chance to answer. "We are getting too big for -fairy stories. We have just begun to study geography -at school. We like it better than anything -we've ever had. So Lucy and I have been talking -it over. We said we would ask you to tell us true -stories now about America, and the Indians, and the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">15</a></span> -brave white people who first dared to come here, -you know, and all such things."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam fairly beamed with delight.</p> - -<p>"I've been thinking of that very thing, children. -I have been longing for the time when you would -like to hear some of the history of this glorious -country. You will like it, too. Why, it is better -than any fairy stories that ever were told."</p> - -<p>In five minutes more the old man was sitting in -his big easy chair on the porch. Lucy was perched -on one of the broad arms of the chair, and Joe on -the other.</p> - -<p>"We are all ready, so please begin," said Lucy, -coaxingly.</p> - -<p>"Very well. Shut your eyes for a minute so -you cannot look at those rows of hollyhocks in -front of you. I want you to see a different picture. -You must take a peep at this country of ours before -a white man ever set foot on it."</p> - -<p>"All right; I am ready, for my eyes are shut -tight," cried Joe with a laugh.</p> - -<p>"Now, then. First you must notice the great -forests that stretch over a large part of the land. -Wild beasts are roaming about in the darkness of -those woods. Wolves and foxes, bears and wildcats<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">16</a></span> -live a free and happy life, for the sound of a -gun has never yet been heard.</p> - -<p>"Turn your thoughts next to the great plains of -the west. Thousands of buffaloes are wandering -about. The herds are so vast that in some places -the earth is fairly black with them.</p> - -<p>"Here and there, over the country, stand the villages -of the Red Men. They are usually built near -the shores of streams or ponds so that fresh water -may be plentiful.</p> - -<p>"There are no stores, no factories, no churches, -no roads, from one shore of America to the other.</p> - -<p>"At first, it may seem strange to you that the Indians -made no roads, for they were traveling a good -deal of the time. They moved their homes whenever -the game became scarce where they happened -to be living. Besides that, they delighted in war -and one tribe was continually taking some other -one by surprise.</p> - -<p>"They did not, however, go about in the way -white people do. They journeyed on foot in single -file and the narrow paths they trod through the -forests can be seen to this day. Some of those paths -are hundreds of years old. They are many miles -in length. Such paths are called trails.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">17</a></span></p> - -<p>"I have traveled over one of the Indian trails. It -was in the state of New York. It made me feel -queer as I thought of the painted Red Men who so -long ago made that path through the dark woods.</p> - -<p>"The clothing and houses of these people were -quite different in the different parts of this country. -The games and festivals of one tribe were often unlike -those of any other.</p> - -<p>"Some Indians lived in tents covered with the -skins of wild animals. Others had houses of birch -bark. Then again, there were tribes who braided -grasses into pretty mats with which they covered -the framework of their houses.</p> - -<p>"The food was also different. In the south, -where the air is warm and pleasant almost all the -year, the Red Men ate a great deal of fruit. Up -here in the north they lived largely on the corn that -the women planted and tended, while out on the -great plains they ate quantities of buffalo meat."</p> - -<p>Lucy's eyes opened wider and wider as the old -man talked.</p> - -<p>"I didn't need to close them at all," she said. -"I can always see the pictures you paint with words. -You make them so bright, Uncle Sam."</p> - -<p>"Some other time, my dear, we will talk more<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">18</a></span> -about the Red Children, but now we will turn to -the first white men who visited America.</p> - -<p>"The first visitors from Europe were bold Norsemen. -Their homes were in the far north. There -were many deep, narrow bays along the shores of -their own country and they loved the ocean from -the time they were born. While they were still -children, they learned to sail over its rough waves, -and by the time they were young men they were -quite fearless. The worst storms and the fiercest -winds did not make them tremble.</p> - -<p>"From year to year they kept sailing farther and -farther westward in their queer boats."</p> - -<p>"Why were they queer, Uncle Sam?" asked Lucy.</p> - -<p>"They would seem queer to us because they had -such high prows and sterns and because large figures -of dragons and other strange creatures were often -carved on the ends of the boats. The sails, too, -were of a different shape from any you ever saw.</p> - -<p>"But let me go on with my story. It happened -one time that some Vikings, as these brave Norse -seamen were called, sailed so far into the west that -they came to an island they had never seen before. -This was Iceland. You have heard the name, -haven't you, children?"</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">19</a></span></p> - -<p>"Yes, Uncle Sam."</p> - -<p>"Iceland lies about half-way between Europe and -America, but it is much farther north than we are. -The Norsemen who came upon it by accident, called -it Snowland."</p> - -<p>"I think that is a pretty name. I wish it were -called Snowland, now," said Lucy, half to herself.</p> - -<p>"Yes, it is a pretty name," said Uncle Sam. -Then he went on.</p> - -<p>"The one who first saw Iceland did not remain -there. He went back to Norway. Four years -later, another Norseman was driven to the coast of -Iceland by a storm. Before he left it, he sailed all -around its shores and found it was an island.</p> - -<p>"When he got home again, he said it was such -a pleasant place that another daring Viking decided -to go to Iceland to live. He carried seeds for planting -and cattle to furnish milk and meat. He stayed -there all one winter. It was so cold that the poor -cattle died.</p> - -<p>"When spring came, the Norseman made ready -to plant his seeds, but the land was still covered -with ice. 'This is not a fit place for anyone to live,' -he cried. He once more packed his goods on his -ship and sailed for Norway.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">20</a></span></p> - -<p>"That, however, was not the end of the white -men's life in Iceland. Ten years after that another -band of Norsemen went there and settled. They -lived in peace and comfort. Children were born -and grew up in that cold island of the north. They -were carefully taught by their parents and became -wise men and women. This settlement in Iceland -lasted for hundreds of years.</p> - -<p>"You children may wonder why I tell you so -much about the Norsemen coming to Iceland, but -it is like the first step of a ladder. Perhaps you are -getting tired, though, and do not wish to hear any -more to-night."</p> - -<p>"O no, we are not a bit tired, Uncle Sam," said -both Lucy and her brother.</p> - -<p>"Well, then, if Iceland was the first step toward -America, Greenland was the second one.</p> - -<p>"Some of the early settlers in Iceland were driven -westward in a storm while they were out sailing. -It was then that they first saw the rocky shores of -Greenland.</p> - -<p>"A good many years after this there was a certain -man living in Iceland named Eric the Red. -He did not get along very well with his neighbors<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">21</a></span> -and had many quarrels with them. He said to himself:</p> - -<p>"'I will seek that land west of us and will make -a home for myself there.'</p> - -<p>"He sailed away from Iceland and was not heard -of again for three years. When he came back on -a visit, he spoke of the place where he had been -living as 'Greenland.' He thought:</p> - -<p>"'If I give it a good name, others will like to go -there and settle.'"</p> - -<p>"Now I know why it was called Greenland," said -Lucy, laughing. "Whenever we sing 'From Greenland's -Icy Mountains,' I always wonder about the -name. I knew it must be a cold and icy land, because -of the words of the hymn."</p> - -<p>"Yes, that was the way of it. The name Greenland -sounded very pleasant to the people of Iceland -and a large company of them went back with Eric -to settle among the icy mountains you sing about.</p> - -<p>"We come now to the third accident and the -third step that brought the Norsemen to our own -land.</p> - -<p>"Eric the Red had sons. They were bold and -daring sailors, like their father. During the long -winter evenings they used to listen to the stories of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">22</a></span> -the older people. There was one that they liked -best of all. It was the tale of a young man named -Biarne who was trying to find the way from Iceland -to Greenland. His father had gone there with -Eric, and Biarne wished to follow him.</p> - -<p>"He started off in the right direction. When he -had sailed out of sight of land, a thick fog settled -down. Then a north wind began to blow. Day -after day, the ship was driven by the strong north -wind. Biarne could do nothing but wonder, 'Where -are we going? Surely, this wind will never carry -us to Greenland.'</p> - -<p>"At last the fog cleared away and not long after -that the Norseman and his crew found they were -sailing near a shore on which trees were growing. -Low hills rose behind it. It could not be Greenland, -truly, for Biarne had been told that the hills -there were high and that they were covered with ice.</p> - -<p>"When Biarne refused to land, his men were quite -angry. 'I must go on with my search for my -father,' he told them. 'I only care now to find him.'</p> - -<p>"Again they set sail and after two more days -they saw land again. It was low and wooded, so -Biarne knew that this could not be the country he -was seeking.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">23</a></span></p> - -<p>"'I will not stop here,' he told his men. Of -course they grumbled, but they were obliged to do -as he wished.</p> - -<p>"Three more days passed, and a land with high -and snowy mountains came into sight.</p> - -<p>"'I am sure this is not Greenland, either,' said -Biarne, and he would not stop. He sailed along its -shores, however, long enough to find it was an -island.</p> - -<p>"In three days from that time, he reached the -shores of Greenland. When Biarne at last cast -anchor he was very near that part of the country -where his father was living.</p> - -<p>"Whenever Eric's sons heard this story of Biarne, -they thought, 'When we grow up, we will go to sea. -Then we will try to find the country with green -hills and many trees. Who knows what else we -shall see in such a pleasant land?"</p> - -<p>"The time came at last when the eldest son of -Eric was old enough to start on a long voyage. It -was in the year 1000. Biarne went with him.</p> - -<p>"The first shore that met their eyes was Newfoundland. -They landed and found it was a plain -covered with stones. They returned to the ships -and soon Nova Scotia came in sight.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">24</a></span></p> - -<p>"After they had looked over that land, they -started once more and sailed southward. They -came to our own New England. I believe they -were not a hundred miles away from where we are -this very minute.</p> - -<p>"They were much pleased with the place. They -found plenty of large salmon in the waters. Trees -grew everywhere about them. The air was much -warmer and pleasanter than in Greenland.</p> - -<p>"There was one thing which delighted them more -than anything else. They found vines with great -bunches of grapes growing upon them. This is -how it happened. One night one of their party was -missing. He had gone with a few men to look -around and see what they could discover. This -man was a German and his name was Tyrker. His -friends came back without him. He had wandered -away from them. They believed he was lost.</p> - -<p>"Everyone felt bad. They thought they should -never see him again. Some of them went to hunt -for the missing man. They had not gone far when -they met him. He seemed wild with joy. He -could hardly speak, he was so glad. At first, his -friends thought he had lost his mind.</p> - -<p>"After a while he was able to say that he had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">25</a></span> -found vines with grapes upon them. He knew -what they were, for he had seen grapes growing in -his own country of Germany.</p> - -<p>"It seemed too good to be true. They all knew -that the wine they liked so well was made from -grapes. They followed Tyrker and found the vines -he had described.</p> - -<p>"What a treasure they had discovered! Stores -of grapes were gathered day after day and carried -on board the ship. Trees were also cut down, for -the people in Greenland would be glad to have all -the lumber their friends could bring them.</p> - -<p>"The Vikings said, 'We will call this place Vinland -because of the grape vines we have found.'</p> - -<p>"As soon as the ship had been loaded with all it -could carry, the joyful party left our shores and -turned northward once more. During their short -visit here they saw no other people.</p> - -<p>"When they reached home they told such bright -stories of their visit that others wished to go to -Vinland.</p> - -<p>"Another party of Norsemen soon started. When -they got here, they met some people who must have -been Eskimos. These savages were quite short and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">26</a></span> -had broad faces. They had skin boats such as the -Eskimos use to this day."</p> - -<p>"I never heard of Eskimos around here!" said -Joe in surprise.</p> - -<p>"I don't know how to explain it except in this -way," replied Uncle Sam. "In those days the -Eskimos, or some of them, must have lived along -these shores, for the Norsemen certainly found them -here. The Indians may have driven them away -afterwards. We can only guess about it.</p> - -<p>"The last Norsemen who came here did not stay -long. Many things happened to prevent it. I will -tell you of one of these, because it is really funny.</p> - -<p>"A bull which the Norsemen had brought among -their cattle rushed out of the woods one day. It -frightened some Eskimos who had come to trade -with the white men. They managed to reach their -boats and paddled away as fast as they could go. -They thought the bull was some dreadful creature -the Norsemen would use against them in war.</p> - -<p>"They went away, as I said, but they returned -with great numbers of their own people. The Vikings -said that they were now like a rushing torrent. -They came to fight and to drive the white men from -their shores.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">27</a></span></p> - -<p>"It would have been a sad day for the Norsemen -if it had not been for one brave woman. They were -fleeing from the Eskimos when she rushed out and -faced the savages. She did not try to attack them, -but began to strike at herself with a sword. They -were so startled that they turned and fled to their -boats.</p> - -<p>"This was only one of the many adventures the -Vikings had in Vinland. They had so many -troubles that after a few years they made up their -minds to remain in Greenland."</p> - -<p>"How do you know all these things are true, -Uncle Sam? Did the Norse people write books -about them?"</p> - -<p>"Those are good questions, Joe. The Norsemen -did not write any history of themselves at that time. -They did not know how to write. They were great -story-tellers, however, and during the long winter -evenings they used to tell, over and over again, the -things that had happened to them. They made -songs about their adventures. Their children -learned these songs and when they grew up they -taught them to their children. Hundreds of years -afterwards Roman priests came among them and -told them of the Christian God. At the same time<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">28</a></span> -the priests taught them to read and write. They -now began to write down the history of their people.</p> - -<p>"But, dear me, children, I have been so busy talking -I never thought how late it is growing. There -is your father at the gate. He must be coming for -you."</p> - -<p>"Thank you, Uncle Sam," said Lucy, as she -kissed the old man good-night, "I enjoyed what you -told us ever so much."</p> - -<p>"I am glad you started with the Norsemen," said -Joe. "I always like to hear the first part of anything. -So, of course, as you are going to tell us -the story of America, we ought to know the very -beginning of it."</p> - -<p>"My dear boy," said Uncle Sam, "no one knows -the real beginning. All I could do was to start with -the coming of the white men to this country."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">29</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER II<br /> -<span class="small">THE GENOESE SAILOR</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"Here</span> we are, Uncle Sam. We came early -so there would be time for a good long -story."</p> - -<p>The old man sat reading his newspaper in the soft -light of the setting sun. He looked up with a pleasant -smile to greet the twins as they came arm in arm -down the path.</p> - -<p>"So you did not get too tired last night, Joe?" -he replied. "I didn't know but that you would beg -me to go back to fairy stories and leave true ones -till you get older."</p> - -<p>"Fairy stories indeed!" exclaimed the boy with a -look of scorn. "Lucy and I both want to hear about -real people. Don't we Lucy?"</p> - -<p>"Of course; we said so last night, and we think -so more than ever now. Have you made up your -mind what to tell us next, Uncle Sam? But perhaps -you want to finish your newspaper."</p> - -<p>"Newspapers can wait till little folk are asleep in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">30</a></span> -their beds, my darlings. Besides, I have a story all -ready and waiting. It is knocking at the door of -my mind this very moment and saying, 'Please let -me out, please let me out.' So out it must come. -There, Joe, stretch yourself comfortably in that -hammock; and Lucy, take the steamer chair and -draw it up close by my side. Now I hope you are -both ready for a visit to another part of the world.</p> - -<p>"We won't take any trunks, and there will be no -sea-sickness, nor trouble of any kind. So let us -start at once on a voyage across the Atlantic Ocean.</p> - -<p>"Whew! Here we are safe and sound on the -shores of Italy. The waves are rolling gently and -the air is sweet and pleasant.</p> - -<p>"A dark-skinned boy is sitting on the edge of the -wharf and looking out to sea. He is watching the -ships coming into port. He can see a tiny speck -in the distance but he knows it is the top of some -mast. As he watches it a sail comes into view under -it. It comes nearer and nearer until the whole of a -ship can be seen.</p> - -<p>"The name of the boy who sat looking out to sea -was Christopher Columbus.</p> - -<p>"He loved the sea better than anything else. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">31</a></span> -longed to live on it and make long voyages. He -did not know what it was to be afraid.</p> - -<p>"As he grew up, he read all he could about the -earth. He found that some wise men believed it -was not flat, as many supposed, but was round. -They also thought it much smaller than it really is.</p> - -<p>"The young Columbus said to himself: 'If the -world is really round, we can reach India by sailing -west, instead of making such a long and tiresome -journey to the east."</p> - -<p>"Why did he care so much about getting to India?" -asked Lucy.</p> - -<p>"The people of Europe thought India was the -richest land in the world. It had great stores of -gold and silver. Beautiful silks and satins, wonderful -pearls and emeralds, fragrant spices,—all these -things were brought from that glorious land. It -is no wonder that Columbus, as well as everyone -else, was interested in such a rich country.</p> - -<p>"There was another reason, however, why Columbus -thought so much about India and wished to -find a shorter way of reaching it. He loved the -Lord with all his heart. He had been told that the -people of the East were heathens and that they worshiped -idols.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">32</a></span></p> - -<p>"He thought: 'I would like to tell these people of -the One God and of Jesus, the Friend of all men.'</p> - -<p>"I believe he cared more about that than for the -silks and spices.</p> - -<p>"As soon as Columbus was old enough, he went -to sea with some of his relations. He learned how -to steer a ship and how to manage it in storms. -He proved himself brave and daring in sea-fights. -He studied the winds and tides.</p> - -<p>"The time came at last when he spoke to the people -of his own town in Italy. He told them he believed -he could find India by sailing to the west. -They did not listen to him. He himself could not fit -up ships to make a long voyage, for he had no -money. So he could not try his experiment.</p> - -<p>"Years passed by and Columbus went to Portugal. -He still had one great desire in his heart. You -know what that was.</p> - -<p>"He lost no time in speaking to the King of Portugal. -The king listened to the plan. He thought -it was a wise one. But he did not offer to send -Columbus on a voyage of discovery. O, no! He -preferred to send some of his own sailors. If the -plan succeeded, he thought he would gain more by -so doing.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">33</a></span></p> - -<p>"He sent the Italian away. Then he took the -maps and charts Columbus had made and showed -them to the wisest men of the country. He thought: -'I will make use of what Columbus knows, but he -shall get no reward.'</p> - -<p>"He was not honest. That is what I think. -Don't you agree with me?"</p> - -<p>"Of course we do," both children exclaimed.</p> - -<p>"Some ships were fitted out and sailed into the -west. They had not gone far, however, before the -sailors became afraid and turned back. The king -of Portugal did not try again."</p> - -<p>"I am glad he didn't," said Lucy.</p> - -<p>"It served him right," cried Joe.</p> - -<p>"We must not leave Columbus," Uncle Sam went -on. "The brave sailor left Portugal, but he was -not discouraged. He kept thinking, thinking where -he should try next. After a while, he thought of -Spain. He knew that country was eager for wealth -and new lands. He would go there. He started for -the Spanish court. His little son went with him.</p> - -<p>"The journey through the country was very tiresome. -They went slowly, for the roads were rough. -The little boy sat in front of his father on the horse's -back.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">34</a></span></p> - -<p>"At last, one evening, they stopped to rest at a -convent. Columbus told the good monks of the -plan that was so dear to him. He showed them his -charts of the world.</p> - -<p>"They were much interested. They said: 'Our -king and queen must see your charts. We believe -they will give you the money to fit out the ships -that you need. It will be a great thing for our -country if you find a short way to India.'</p> - -<p>"Columbus felt happy when he heard the monks' -words. He left his little son in their care and went -on his way to the court of Ferdinand and Isabella.</p> - -<p>"The king and queen listened kindly, but they -could see no way of giving money to Columbus. A -war was going on at this very time and they needed -all their money to carry it on.</p> - -<p>"Columbus stayed in Spain for seven long years. -He tried to get some of the rich men of the country -to listen to his plans and furnish money. It was -all in vain.</p> - -<p>"At last, just as he was leaving the country, some -messengers came to him. They said: 'Queen -Isabella wishes to talk with you once more. She -would like to help you.'</p> - -<p>"How gladly Columbus turned back! He found<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">35</a></span> -the queen had such faith in him that she was even -willing to sell her beautiful jewels, if necessary, for -the sake of giving him money.</p> - -<p>"He set to work at once to get a fleet ready. -Three ships were chosen. Their bows and sterns -were built high up out of the water. They were -very different from the ships of to-day. Provisions -to last a whole year were stowed away in them.</p> - -<p>"It was not as easy to find sailors as it was to get -the ships."</p> - -<p>"I don't see why," interrupted Joe. "I should -think there would have been plenty of men eager -to go."</p> - -<p>"Not so, my lad," replied Uncle Sam. "Only -the boldest men would dare to sail far into the west -at that time. The people of those days were full of -queer fancies. They thought they would come to -enchanted islands and great dragons and all sorts of -fearful things if they went far away from home.</p> - -<p>"At last, however, enough sailors promised to -go and the great day came for the ships to set sail. -How excited everyone was! Would these men ever -come back to the shores of Spain? Would they -really find India, or was it only the dream of a very -bold man?</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">36</a></span></p> - -<p>"The wharves were covered with people who had -gathered to see the ships start on their daring -voyage.</p> - -<p>"They sailed farther and farther into the west; -now the lower parts could be but dimly seen; then -only the tops of the masts; then they faded altogether -from sight.</p> - -<p>"Now let us leave the onlookers of the shores -and join the brave Columbus on the deck of the -Santa Maria, his flag-ship.</p> - -<p>"Day after day he guided the ships onward and -ever westward. After they had passed the Canary -Islands, the men were always on the watch for signs -of some new land. After days, and then weeks, on -the great ocean the sailors became afraid. They -begged their leader to turn back, but they begged -in vain. He would not listen.</p> - -<p>"At first he tried to keep up their courage by -telling them of the riches they would gain, or the -honors their church would give them if they carried -the teachings of Christ to the heathens. When such -words lost their power Columbus became stern. He -told the men how angry the king would be if they -did not obey their captain.</p> - - -<div class="figcenter"> - <img src="images/i_036.jpg" alt="Santa_Maria" /> - <div class="caption"> - <span class="small">COLUMBUS AND HIS FLAG-SHIP</span> - </div> -</div> - - -<p>"The time came when they began to plot against<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">37</a></span> -Columbus. They said: 'We will destroy him. -Then, when we get home, we will say that he fell -overboard.'</p> - -<p>"Could they ever reach home, now they were so -far away? The men became afraid of what might -happen to them if Columbus were dead and no one -left to pilot them home again. So they did not -kill him.</p> - -<p>"He knew they did not feel kindly to him and -he thought it would be best to make some bargain -with them. So he said: 'If we do not see land in a -certain number of days I will promise to turn back -toward Spain.'</p> - -<p>"How eagerly he now watched from the deck -of his vessel! It seemed as though his hopes and -beliefs would not prove true. The last day came,—the -day on which he had promised to turn back if -they found no signs of land.</p> - -<p>"Lo! a stick carved by some person's hand came -floating along by the ship's side. This was not all, -for a branch with berries on it was picked up out of -the water. Land must be near!</p> - -<p>"'I will give a large reward to the man who first -sees it,' cried Columbus. As he watched that very<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">38</a></span> -night he saw a light in the distance. It moved. He -called two of his men to look at it.</p> - -<p>"Their hearts leaped for joy at the sight.</p> - -<p>"Before morning came, a sailor saw the shore -in the distance by the light of the moon.</p> - -<p>"Children," said Uncle Sam solemnly, "never forget -that it was the 12th of October of the year 1492 -that Columbus first stepped upon the shores of the -New World. He was dressed in a full suit of steel -armor and he held the royal banner of Spain as he -landed on the island which he named San Salvador.</p> - -<p>"He planted the cross of the Christians and, with -his officers and men around him, knelt down to thank -God for His great goodness in bringing them so far -in safety.</p> - -<p>"'How beautiful, how beautiful!' Columbus exclaimed -as he looked about him. Tall palm trees -were moving gently in the warm breeze; strange and -lovely flowers were growing all around; birds of -bright colors flew overhead.</p> - -<p>"But these were not the only things to fill the -brave sailor with wonder. He and his men were -soon surrounded by strange-looking people. They -had straight black hair and dark red skins. They -wore little or no clothing.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">39</a></span></p> - -<p>"'This is India, without a doubt,' said Columbus, -'and these people are Indians.'</p> - -<p>"He noticed the gold ornaments in their ears and -he thought with delight of the treasures he would -carry back to Spain to good Queen Isabella.</p> - -<p>"The Red Men were as much surprised as the -Spaniards. They whispered to each other, 'These -white beings must be gods come from the heavens -to visit us.'</p> - -<p>"Then they pointed to the ships and said, 'The -great birds that have brought them to us are now -floating on the water.'</p> - -<p>"The Indians wished to show honor to their visitors. -They hurried to their simple homes and gathered -grains and fruits. They brought them as -presents to the Spaniards.</p> - -<p>"The white men were glad to receive the corn, -cotton, and fruits. They feasted on the delicious -cocoanuts and bananas, yet they were not satisfied. -Gold was what they most wanted. When they asked -the Indians where to find it, the savages pointed -towards the south."</p> - -<p>"I am glad Columbus wasn't a Spaniard," said -Joe, who had kept still a long time for a lively boy. -"I just hate the Spaniards. I believe all they care<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">40</a></span> -for is riches. It's a good thing we beat them in -the last war."</p> - -<p>"My dear child," replied Uncle Sam, "You should -hate no one. We may thank the Spaniards for one -thing at least. If it had not been for them, Columbus -might never have been able to cross the ocean -and discover America. You must remember they -gave him the ships and money he needed."</p> - -<p>"It was the good Queen Isabella," said Joe, "and -she didn't seem at all like the rest of her people. -But please excuse me for interrupting you, Uncle -Sam."</p> - -<p>"That is all right, Joe. It shows you are a good -listener. Now we will go back to Columbus resting -among the palm trees.</p> - -<p>"I am sure you children would have loved him. -He had bright, keen eyes, yet they were kind and -loving; and he moved about with the air of a king."</p> - -<p>"He had the right to do so," said Lucy, thoughtfully. -"He couldn't help feeling how great he -was."</p> - -<p>"You are quite right," answered Uncle Sam, as -he patted the little girl's head. "Even the steps of -a brave man must be different from those of a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">41</a></span> -coward. The bravery gets into them without the -man's thinking about it.</p> - -<p>"But dear me! It is getting late, and I am only -half through my story. We have turned our backs -on Columbus and left him alone with the Red Men -quite as long as is polite. He enjoyed himself very -much with them, however, and stayed several days -on the island.</p> - -<p>"Then he took to his ships once more and sailed -about among the different islands which he called -the Indies. He thought that the right name for -them, as he still believed he was near the mainland -of India.</p> - -<p>"Each time they landed, his men kept asking the -natives where gold could be found. Each time they -were disappointed. But Columbus thought it must -be near at hand. He never dreamed that he was -still far from the land of spices and precious stones.</p> - -<p>"At the end of twelve weeks he said, 'We ought -to go back to Spain and tell what we have discovered.'</p> - -<p>"He gathered stores of the strange fruits and -grains and rich woods and packed them safely away -in the ships. He also took some of the brightly-feathered -birds.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">42</a></span></p> - -<p>"He left a part of the sailors on one of the islands. -They were to make a settlement. Then they would -have a home ready for Columbus when he should -come again with more of their people.</p> - -<p>"When he had chosen some of the Indians to go -back with him, all was ready and he began to cross -the great ocean once more."</p> - -<p>"He must have been almost bursting with pride -and joy," cried Joe. "And the voyage home must -have seemed long, because he had so much to tell."</p> - -<p>"It came to an end at last, although there were -terrible storms and the ships came very near being -wrecked," Uncle Sam went on. "At length, however, -they reached Spain.</p> - -<p>"The news of their return spread quickly. As -soon as Columbus landed crowds gathered to hear -about his voyage and the whole country was filled -with joy.</p> - -<p>"When Columbus went to court to tell his story -to the king and queen they would not let him stand -before them. 'He is too great a man,' they thought. -'He has gained the right to sit in our presence.'"</p> - -<p>"O, my!" said Joe, "I thought everybody had to -stand before kings and queens."</p> - -<p>"Columbus wasn't a king, but he was certainly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">43</a></span> -as great, only in another way. Ferdinand was quite -right in thinking so. He and his good wife listened -with delight to the story of the greatest voyage any -man ever made.</p> - -<p>"They believed as Columbus did that a short way -to India had been found. They eagerly examined -the curious things brought to them from the west. -They ate of the delicious fruits and admired the -bright birds and beautiful woods.</p> - -<p>"They said: 'We will have a grand procession -through the streets of our city. Columbus shall -wear beautiful garments and shall ride in the midst.'</p> - -<p>"The Indians, bright with paint and feathers, -went first of all in the procession. Crowds of people -lined the streets to see the Red Men, the curious -fruits and flowers, the parrots, and the stuffed bodies -of animals they had never heard of before.</p> - -<p>"They wished, most of all, to look upon the great -man who had dared to sail so far into the west and -who had brought India with all its riches to Spain. -For everyone believed this was what Columbus had -done.</p> - -<p>"Many entertainments were prepared for the -great sailor. Nearly everyone wished to give him -honor. A few, however, were jealous.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">44</a></span></p> - -<p>"One day while Columbus was at a dinner party -given in his honor one of the king's courtiers said:</p> - -<p>"'It was not a hard thing to do what this Italian -has done. Anyone else might have done the same -thing.'</p> - -<p>"Of course the man said this because he was -jealous and did not like to see so much attention -given to a poor sailor from Italy.</p> - -<p>"Columbus did not seem troubled at this man's -words. He took an egg from the table and handed -it to the speaker. Then he said:</p> - -<p>"'Can you make that egg stand on end?'</p> - -<p>"The man tried, but could not do it. It was -passed from one person to another. Everyone -failed. At last it came back to Columbus. He took -it in his hand and struck it gently on the table so -that the shell was slightly cracked. Then, taking -away his hand, he left it standing on end.</p> - -<p>"'It is easy enough for anyone to do that,' cried -the courtier.</p> - -<p>"'It is also easy for anyone to find the Indies -after I have shown the way,' was the reply of -Columbus.</p> - -<p>"Not long after this the great man made ready for -another voyage across the ocean.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">45</a></span></p> - -<p>"How different everything was now! There was -no trouble now to find sailors willing to go with -him. Indeed, it was almost too easy. Everyone -was anxious to visit the Indies. They believed it -was the quickest way to gain riches and comfort.</p> - -<p>"When the second fleet was ready to sail there -were seventeen ships and fifteen hundred men. Only -think of it! It was almost like a traveling city.</p> - -<p>"They had no trouble in crossing the ocean, but -when they came to the island where Columbus had -before left a part of his men, there was no sign of -them nor of the homes they had made.</p> - -<p>"'This time I will choose a different place to -settle,' said Columbus.</p> - -<p>"He sailed into a fine harbor about forty miles -away. The men landed and began to build the first -city of the New World for white people to live in. -They called it Isabella after the good queen of Spain.</p> - -<p>"Columbus spent some time as governor of the -settlement. Then he went back to Spain with news -of the white men's city in the west. He did not -stay long, however. He was soon restless for a -third voyage across the great ocean.</p> - -<p>"He sailed farther to the southward than he had -before. For the first time he saw the shores of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">46</a></span> -South America. Then he went back to the settlement -in the West Indies, but the people were not -glad to see him."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam stopped for a moment and looked -quite sad.</p> - -<p>"Children," he said, "I must tell the truth and say -that Columbus was not as good a governor as he -was a sailor. It would have been hard work for -anyone to rule his people, for they had to work -hard and they were not satisfied because gold was -not plentiful.</p> - -<p>"'It is not what we expected,' they cried angrily. -'We thought you would bring us to a land filled -with gold and diamonds.'</p> - -<p>"Some of them even whispered among themselves, -'Columbus is not what he pretends to be. He -has cheated us badly.'</p> - -<p>"At last they declared they would not let him stay -there any longer. They put chains upon him and -sent him back to Spain."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam took a picture from the table drawer.</p> - -<p>"Look at Columbus now," said the old man. -"There he sits on the deck of the ship with heavy -chains bound on his arms like one who has done a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">47</a></span> -great wrong. Yet he gave a whole continent to the -people who put them on him.</p> - -<p>"'I will take off your chains,' said the kind-hearted -captain of the ship. It is a shame for you -to wear them.'</p> - -<p>"'No, no. Let them remain,' answered Columbus. -I will wear them as a token of the kindness -of princes.'</p> - -<p>"How different was his third landing in Spain! -This time there were no crowds waiting to show him -honor. He was carried before the queen, who wept -in pity at the sight of her old friend in chains. The -brave man now broke down. As he tried to tell his -story his words were choked with sobs.</p> - -<p>"Isabella did not desert him, however. She -helped him to fit out another fleet and he started on -his last voyage. He sailed among other islands of -the West Indies and returned to Spain after a great -deal of suffering. He was sick and poor. There -were many who once could not do too much for him -but who now mocked him.</p> - -<p>"He died with the belief that he had found a short -way to India. He had no thought of what he had -really discovered. It is a shame he did not get the -honor he deserved."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">48</a></span></p> - -<p>Uncle Sam rose suddenly from his arm chair and -began to walk up and down the room. "Yes, it is -a shame. A burning shame. Children, let us sing -'Columbia, the Gem of the Ocean.'"</p> - -<p>The old man turned to the little organ at one side -of the room. In a moment the house was filled with -the voices of Uncle Sam and his two young friends. -When the song was over, the children kissed him -good-night and started for home.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">49</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER III<br /> -<span class="small">JOHN CABOT AND THE CODFISH</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">That</span> same night after the children had gone -to bed Lucy was just falling asleep when Joe -called out:</p> - -<p>"I say, Lucy, I wonder why our country isn't -always called Columbia instead of America."</p> - -<p>"Do keep still, Joe. I was so nice and sleepy and -now you have waked me up," answered his sister. -"You can ask Uncle Sam the next time you see -him."</p> - -<p>Two or three evenings afterward the old man -was on his knees weeding his pansy bed when he -heard steps near by.</p> - -<p>"Uncle Sam! Uncle Sam! where are you?" called -a girl's voice.</p> - -<p>"Here I am, my little pink of a Lucy," and he -straightened himself up by the side of the apple tree -around which the pansies were growing.</p> - -<p>"That is a lovely place for them. They don't -have too much sunshine. How large the blossoms<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">50</a></span> -are! May I have that big purple one? It looks at -me like a loving face."</p> - -<p>"Of course you may, Lucy. But where is Joe?"</p> - -<p>"He has gone on an errand for mother. After -that, he's coming here. But we can't stay very long -this evening. Mother said we must go to bed early -to-night so as to be fresh for the picnic to-morrow. -You are going, aren't you, Uncle Sam?"</p> - -<p>"Certainly I am. I wouldn't miss it for the -world."</p> - -<p>"I'm so glad. Mother said I must be sure to tell -you not to take any lunch. We shall carry enough -for you. It is a lovely lunch. Roast chicken and -nut cake and apple jelly. I can hardly wait for to-morrow. -Now aren't you glad you are going?"</p> - -<p>"It makes me hungry to think of it, so you and I -will have to eat some cherries I picked this afternoon."</p> - -<p>"Aren't they beauties! How juicy they are. Red -cherries are prettier, but I think I like these blackhearts -the best. Here comes Joe now."</p> - -<p>"You are just in time," called Uncle Sam, as Joe -came hurrying along.</p> - -<p>"Cherries are ripe, cherries are ripe," sang Lucy,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">51</a></span> -as her brother sat down on the steps, quite out of -breath.</p> - -<p>"Christopher!" exclaimed Joe as soon as he could -speak. "I've had an awful long walk and I'm as -tired as anything."</p> - -<p>"You shouldn't say 'Christopher,' nor 'awful,' -either, Joe. They are as bad as slang."</p> - -<p>"You needn't preach, Lucy. I should like to -know a better word than 'Christopher' in the whole -language. Wasn't Columbus's name Christopher?"</p> - -<p>"I know that. It is all the more reason for not -making the word so common. He was too great -a man. But, Uncle Sam, that makes me think of -what Joe was saying the other night. He and I -both think Columbia is a better name for our country -than America."</p> - -<p>"Let us see about that, children. I must tell you -how it all happened.</p> - -<p>"You remember, of course, that Columbus never -knew what he had discovered. He thought he had -visited the shores of Asia. Some years after his -first great voyage another man from his own country -of Italy sailed out into the west. His name was -Americus Vespucius. A little hard to say, isn't it?</p> - -<p>"He was a merchant who had made several long<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">52</a></span> -voyages already. He went farther south than Columbus -and sailed along the shores of South -America.</p> - -<p>"'It is a vast country,' he said to himself, and -he was the first one to call it the 'New World.' He -wrote long letters telling of what he had seen. The -man who printed these letters called the New World -America in his honor. And it has been called -America ever since. But I like Columbia best myself, -children. The name is very dear to me."</p> - -<p>While Joe and Lucy finished eating the cherries, -Uncle Sam sat thinking.</p> - -<p>"What shall I next tell them about our glorious -land?" he said to himself. "Oh, now I know. I -am sure they would like to hear about John Cabot -and the codfish. It isn't a very long story and there -is just time enough before they should go home."</p> - -<p>The twins were quite willing to listen. They had -already found that true stories were quite as interesting -as make-believe ones.</p> - -<p>As they sat on the steps in the twilight this is -what they heard:</p> - -<p>Once upon a time there was a little boy who lived -in Italy. It was about the time that Columbus lived -there, too. The boy's name was John Cabot. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">53</a></span> -loved the sea as Columbus did. He liked to listen -to stories of strange lands.</p> - -<p>When he grew up he was not satisfied to stay at -home. He began to travel and made longer and -longer journeys. After a while he went to England -and made his home in that country. He did not stay -there, however, for he wished to learn all he could -about the world.</p> - -<p>On one of his journeys he traveled to Arabia. -He met some men there who were leading camels -loaded with spices. People used a great deal of -spice in their food and drink, so it was very precious -to them.</p> - -<p>John Cabot began to talk with the men. He -asked them where they got all those spices. They -pointed still farther to the east and explained to -him that it was a long, long way off.</p> - -<p>He thought a good deal about what the men told -him. He said to himself:</p> - -<p>"If I should go west far enough I should surely -come to the east. The wise men must be right when -they tell us the earth is round."</p> - -<p>After he went back to England he heard the great -news from Spain. A man named Columbus had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">54</a></span> -done just what Cabot thought possible. He had -reached the east by sailing west.</p> - -<p>"It is truly wonderful," said the people. It was -the talk of the whole country. John Cabot was as -much excited as everyone else. He asked the king -of England to send him on a voyage to the newly-found -country. The king thought:</p> - -<p>"The Spaniards should not be the only ones to -bring back the riches of India. We must have a -share of their good fortune."</p> - -<p>He was quite willing, therefore, to send John -Cabot, who was a wise man and a good sailor. -Cabot's son went with him on the voyage.</p> - -<p>They came to the mainland of North America, -but they were much farther north than Columbus -had ever been. It was quite cold and the place -looked bare and lonesome.</p> - -<p>They saw no Indians, but there were some fishnets -lying about near the shore. These nets being -there showed that probably people were not far -away.</p> - -<p>"What great numbers of fish there are in these -waters," exclaimed Cabot. "I never in my life before -saw so many. 'The Land of the Codfish' is -a good name for this country."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">55</a></span></p> - -<p>He did not stay long, for food was becoming -scarce. So the ship soon started on the homeward -voyage. When they reached England the sailors -told wonderful stories about the "Land of the Codfish." -They said:</p> - -<p>"The waters were so thick with fish that the ship -sometimes could not move as fast as it otherwise -would. One thing amused us very much. It was -the strange sight of bears fishing! The great -creatures swam out into the water and caught the -fish in their paws. Sometimes the fish were so large -that they fought hard to get away, but the bears -nearly always won the battle."</p> - -<p>John Cabot told the king he had discovered the -country of China. He was treated with the highest -honor and called "The Great Admiral." He was -dressed in rich silks. The king promised he should -have a sum of money given him every year for the -rest of his life.</p> - -<p>After a while the king began to say to himself:</p> - -<p>"It is all very well to make a voyage to the west -and find the east, but that is not enough. I should -like some of the gold and gems and delicious spices -found there."</p> - -<p>So it came about that John Cabot and his son<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">56</a></span> -started out on a second voyage. When they reached -North America this time they sailed along its shores -for a long distance. They saw Indians dressed in -skins and wearing ornaments of copper. But they -found no gold nor spices.</p> - -<p>Cabot still thought he had visited Asia. The king -of England did not care about him any longer, however. -He was of no use if he could not bring to -England the treasures of India. This is probably -the reason we know nothing more about John Cabot.</p> - -<p>We do not even know how long he lived nor when -he died. His son Sebastian lived to be a bright and -lively old man and was always glad to hear of the -voyages of others to far-away places.</p> - -<p>When Uncle Sam had finished the story of John -Cabot he told the children why he wished them to -remember it.</p> - -<p>"Columbus made his voyages with the help of -Spain," said he. "That country claimed the right -to hold the lands he discovered. That is why the -people who settled in the West Indies and in almost -all of South America came from Spain and spoke -the Spanish language.</p> - -<p>"But John Cabot sailed for the English king and -that is why the English said:</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">57</a></span></p> - -<p>"'We claim the eastern part of North America.'</p> - -<p>"Years after the time of John Cabot they sent -people to settle here. They spoke our language and -planted English ways and English thoughts with -their corn and potatoes."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam laughed as he added, "Maybe you and -I would have been Spaniards if it had not been for -John Cabot. I wonder how you would have liked -that, Joe. I know you are not too fond of your -Spanish cousins."</p> - -<p>"Cousins! Ugh! I don't like to think of their -being relations of mine."</p> - -<p>"My dear boy, this world isn't so very large after -all, and one great Father loves us and cares for all. -Of course, we think America could teach Spain one -or two things, but I don't doubt she could help us -in some ways, too. No one is perfect, Joe, or else -we shouldn't need to live in this world. Come, -children, give me a kiss and run off to your little -beds."</p> - -<p>"Good-night, sleep tight, and don't let the mosquitos -bite," Lucy called to her old friend as she -followed Joe down the path.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">58</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER IV<br /> -<span class="small">THE FOUNTAIN OF YOUTH</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">A</span> finer day could not have been chosen for -the picnic. When the party started for the -pine grove four miles from home there were six -carriages full of people. It was a lovely place for -a picnic party and Joe and Lucy played hard all day -with their little friends. Six o'clock came all too -soon.</p> - -<p>"Please stay a little longer and eat the rest of our -lunch for supper," begged the children. The older -people were quite willing.</p> - -<p>"It is a good thing we can get plenty of good -water from that spring," said Lucy's father. "It -is nearly as cold as ice water and certainly as cold as -anyone ever ought to drink. I should like to come -here every day for the sake of a drink of it."</p> - -<p>"I love to hear the water as it makes its way -down over the rocks. They say the spring never -dries up, even in the hottest days of summer," said -Uncle Sam, who was standing near.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">59</a></span></p> - -<p>"Uncle Sam! A story, a story!" cried some one, -as they settled themselves on the grass to eat chicken -sandwiches and apple turnovers.</p> - -<p>"That spring makes me think of something you -might like to hear. It is true, though it is nearly -as strange as a fairy story. I suppose the older -ones all know it."</p> - -<p>"Do tell it, Uncle Sam," cried the children, and -their parents seemed as willing to listen as the little -ones.</p> - -<p>As the evening clouds changed from silver to -gold and crimson, and the young moon peeped -shyly out in the evening sky, Uncle Sam told the -story of</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p2t p1b">THE FOUNTAIN OF EVERLASTING YOUTH</p> - -<p>A long time ago there was a young knight in -Spain named Ponce de Leon. He was gay and -handsome, fond of dress and of good times. Columbus -had made his voyages to America and come back -to Spain to die.</p> - -<p>The men whom he had left in the West Indies -needed a governor. The king looked around his -court. At last he chose Ponce de Leon as the best -man to send to the New World. The knight was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">60</a></span> -quite willing, so he went to live in the island of -Porto Rico, one of the West Indies.</p> - -<p>His life was an easy one. He did very little himself -but was a cruel master over the poor Indians -who had to work hard at his bidding. Before the -white men came among them they had easy times, -swinging in their hammocks, bathing in the clear -waters, and eating the wild fruits which were so -plentiful.</p> - -<p>Everything was changed after the arrival of the -cruel Spaniards.</p> - -<p>"These white men are great and wise," the Indians -had thought at first. "We must serve them -and give them all we can. They wish gold. We -will show them where they can find it in the earth -and the beds of the rivers."</p> - -<p>These poor savages of Porto Rico were gentle -creatures. They knew little about war. When they -found the Spaniards had no love for them and cared -for nothing except gold, it was too late to save themselves. -They were forced to wait upon their white -masters. They had to work in the gold mines as -they had never worked before. They missed the -pleasant sunlight. They became weak and sick. -Great numbers of them died.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">61</a></span></p> - -<p>All this time Ponce de Leon was storing away -great piles of the gold the Indians brought him. -He made a poor governor. The king of Spain at -last sent word he should no longer rule over the -island of Porto Rico.</p> - -<p>He was now growing old. He had been sick -many times. He began to think of what the Indians -had told him. They said:</p> - -<p>"Much gold can be found in the land north of -us. Something better than gold can also be found -there. It is a wonderful fountain. If anyone tastes -of its waters he shall never be sick again but shall -be young forever."</p> - -<p>The heart of the Spaniard leaped for joy. "That -is what I want," he said. "Such a fountain is indeed -better than all the gold in the world."</p> - -<p>He might very easily say this, for he already had -all the gold he needed.</p> - -<p>He started out with a gay company of his friends. -They sailed about among the islands, stopping here -and there to feast and make merry.</p> - -<p>Still they sailed on toward the north till at last -they came in sight of a land beautiful with flowers. -It was a glorious Easter Sunday. The air was -sweet with delicious odors.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">62</a></span></p> - -<p>"I will call this place Florida," said Ponce de -Leon, "because it is the Flowery Easter."</p> - -<p>He and his men spent some time wandering about -through the country, always looking for the wonderful -fountain.</p> - -<p>"It may be here," he would think as he picked -his way through a forest.</p> - -<p>"Listen!" one of his friends would cry as he heard -the sound of running water and thought it might -be the Fountain of Youth they were seeking.</p> - -<p>They were disappointed again and again. At last -they went back to the ships and sailed for Spain. -They had found plenty of fruits and flowers. They -had met many Indians, some of whom were friendly -and gentle, but others were fierce and warlike. -Their eager eyes never beheld the Fountain of -Youth.</p> - -<p>Ponce de Leon did not give up his hope of finding -it, however. He told the king of Spain of the beautiful -country of Florida and that he hoped to find -gold there. The king said:</p> - -<p>"You may be the governor of this new land if -you will take others with you and settle there."</p> - -<p>The old man went back to Florida. Alas! he only -went to pain and trouble. As he was about to land,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">63</a></span> -a party of Indians came out to meet him. They -were not willing to let the white men come on shore. -A fight took place. Ponce de Leon was shot. A -poisoned arrow entered his body and made a frightful -wound. He went back to the ship and set sail -for Cuba. His wound did not heal, for the poison -from the arrow was still working.</p> - -<p>He never again tried to find the Fountain of -Youth, for he died in a few days.</p> - -<p>"Nobody else ever found it, either," said Uncle -Sam as he finished the story.</p> - -<p>"People used to have such silly notions," said one -of the party, as they packed up to go home.</p> - -<p>"The more they traveled, the wiser they became," -replied Uncle Sam. "There is nothing like travel -to make our minds grow. Some time I may go -round the world myself. I'm not too old yet."</p> - -<p>"I hope you will let Joe and me go with you," -said Lucy, as she took hold of his hand and pointed -to the waiting carriage.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">64</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER V<br /> -<span class="small">THE GOOD KNIGHT AND THE LOST BABY</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">Joe</span> and Lucy were sitting on Uncle Sam's steps. -They were busy making daisy wreaths.</p> - -<p>"We will put a double crown on Uncle Sam's -head," Lucy whispered. "Then we will play he is -the king of Spain sending Ponce de Leon to -Florida."</p> - -<p>The old man heard her. "I shall look quite royal -with such a grand crown," he said with a laugh. -"But to-night you had better pretend I am England's -good Queen Bess. She lived long after John -Cabot. Let me see! It was about seventy-five years -from then to the time Walter Raleigh first met her."</p> - -<p>"There! I've finished my wreath, so please let me -put it on your head. Then I'll be very still while -you talk to us," said Lucy.</p> - -<p>"Mine is done, too," cried Joe.</p> - -<p>"Oh, Uncle Sam, you look just lovely," exclaimed -the little girl, standing up to admire her friend.</p> - -<p>Then she and Joe settled themselves at his feet<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">65</a></span> -to hear the story of Queen Elizabeth and her brave -knight:</p> - -<p>A long time ago there was a little boy in England -named Walter Raleigh. He was a very beautiful -child and as brave as he was handsome.</p> - -<p>While he was still very young he left his quiet -home in the country and went to war in other lands. -In a few years he came back to England. Now, -however, he was a tall, strong man, as brave and -handsome as ever.</p> - -<p>One afternoon he dressed himself in rich and -beautiful clothes and went out to walk. He wore a -white satin vest, a brown doublet embroidered with -pearls, yellow shoes tied with white satin ribbons -and sparkling with precious stones, and a wide hat -trimmed with a long black plume. His dark hair -fell in curls over his shoulders. He was a grand -sight, indeed.</p> - -<p>He had not walked far when lo! he saw Queen -Elizabeth coming that way. The ladies of her court -were with her. Suddenly the queen stopped. A -pool of muddy water stood in her pathway, for a -shower had fallen only a short time before.</p> - -<p>What should she do? The queen stopped to think -how she could keep from wetting her dainty shoes.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">66</a></span></p> - -<p>No sooner had she done this than Walter Raleigh -stepped forward, threw off his rich cloak, and spread -it over the pool. A dry way was thus made for -the queen to pass over.</p> - -<p>She turned to the young man and, thanking him, -gave him a sweet smile. Then she went on her way, -but she did not forget him. She asked her ladies -his name. When he afterwards appeared at court -she was ready to show him kindness.</p> - -<p>She found that Walter Raleigh was not only a -true gentleman, but that he was also brave and wise.</p> - -<p>He went to sea in the queen's ships and showed -that he was a good sailor. He fought in battles for -his country and proved that he was a fine soldier. -He read many books and wrote beautiful poems. -In those times, or any other times, it would be hard -to find a better, braver, finer gentleman than Walter -Raleigh.</p> - -<p>For many years the English people had given little -thought to America. When they found John -Cabot did not discover a short way to India, they -lost interest in the New World.</p> - -<p>Walter Raleigh, however, did not think like the -rest of his people.</p> - -<p>"O Queen," he said to Elizabeth, "you are a great<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">67</a></span> -ruler. But you could become more powerful still. -Why do you not claim some of that land across the -great ocean before Spain seizes all of it? We have -learned from sea captains who have been there lately -that it is rich in beautiful woods and many other -good things."</p> - -<p>Raleigh hated the Spaniards and had already -fought against them in the wars. He knew they -were settled in Mexico, Florida, and the West Indies. -He did not wish them to get hold of the rest -of America. Neither he nor Elizabeth, however, -dreamed of the great size of the country.</p> - -<p>"I will fit out some ships," the queen answered, -"and you may send people to settle on the land -which I will give you in America."</p> - -<p>Two ships were made ready. The men who sailed -in them did not plan to settle in America. They -went only to look around and find a good place -where settlers could come afterward.</p> - -<p>They landed on different islands near the shores -of the mainland. It was farther north than Florida. -The air was warm and pleasant. The explorers -found many fine trees of oak and cedar. Grapes -and melons, corn and peas, were plentiful.</p> - -<p>The Indians whom they met seemed willing to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">68</a></span> -be friends. They admired the white skins of their -visitors and brought presents to them. The white -men gave them beads and other cheap ornaments.</p> - -<p>The Englishmen stayed among them for several -weeks. The Indian women made feasts for their -visitors and bathed their feet and washed their -clothes. The time came at last when the white men -said:</p> - -<p>"We must go back to England and tell about -this beautiful country. We will take home some -furs and skins and we will carry a bracelet of pearls -to Walter Raleigh."</p> - -<p>How his eyes must have sparkled at the sight -of the pearls! They were as large as peas.</p> - -<p>"The Indian women wear such pearls as ornaments," -the sailors said. "The men often go about -with reeds in their mouths. Bowls of walnut shell -are fastened to these reeds and filled with the dried -leaves of a strange plant. Then the Indians set the -leaves on fire. They suck the smoke through the -reeds and blow it out of their mouths. They seem -to take great pleasure in doing this."</p> - -<p>The sailors were speaking of the tobacco plant -and the smoking of its leaves. They had never -seen either before.</p> - - -<div class="figcenter"> - <img src="images/i_068.jpg" alt="Trading" /> - <div class="caption"> - <span class="small">THE ENGLISH TRADING WITH THE INDIANS</span> - </div> -</div> - - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">69</a></span></p> - -<p>Elizabeth was much pleased with what she heard. -She said:</p> - -<p>"This beautiful country shall be called Virginia -in honor of myself."</p> - -<p>The queen was not married. She sometimes said: -"I am wedded to my country, and that is enough." -It was because of this that she was often spoken of -as the "Virgin Queen." She always liked to be -called by this name.</p> - -<p>At this time she made Walter Raleigh a knight -and that is why he has always since been called <i>Sir</i> -Walter Raleigh.</p> - -<p>The next year he sent out one hundred people to -settle in Virginia. They must have been very brave -to seek a new home among the Red Men across the -great ocean. They landed on one of the islands -which their people had visited the year before. -They set to work at once to make a home for themselves.</p> - -<p>It was not long before some rough houses were -built and English housekeeping was begun in -America.</p> - -<p>The Indians were not as kind as they were the -year before. They were jealous of the white men. -They thought:</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">70</a></span></p> - -<p>"It was well enough for them to visit us, but we -do not wish them to live here."</p> - -<p>They had good reasons for not liking the -strangers, for the white men did not treat them -wisely.</p> - -<p>I will tell you of one thing that happened to -make the Indians angry. When the Englishmen -were on an exploring expedition a silver cup was -stolen.</p> - -<p>"The Indians have taken it," they cried.</p> - -<p>They were so angry they marched to an Indian -town near by and burned it to the ground. The -red people of the town fled into the woods, so no -harm was done to them. They were very angry, -however, because their homes were destroyed. -They said to one another:</p> - -<p>"Let us drive the white strangers from our land. -They do us nothing but harm."</p> - -<p>From this time the settlers were not safe. They -never knew when the Indians might attack them. -Many of them were sick and longed to go back to -England.</p> - -<p>When summer came and an English ship sailed -into the harbor, most of them were glad to get on -board and bid good-bye to America.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">71</a></span></p> - -<p>They carried back with them three things which -did not grow in England. These were Indian corn, -white potatoes, and tobacco.</p> - -<p>Sir Walter Raleigh planted the potatoes at his -home in Ireland. The people there liked them so -much that potatoes were soon growing in every -part of the country. That is why they were afterwards -called "Irish potatoes."</p> - -<p>As for the tobacco, Sir Walter became so fond -of smoking it that he was often seen with a pipe -in his mouth. Of course, this was then a strange -sight in Europe. The first time the knight's servant -saw his master smoking, he was frightened. -He thought Raleigh was on fire. He rushed forward -with a pitcher of water and dashed it over -his head. The sudden bath must have been a -surprise, but it probably made the good knight -laugh heartily.</p> - -<p>Though the first settlers came back from America, -Raleigh thought:</p> - -<p>"I will not give up so easily. Virginia is a -beautiful country. It will make a good home. I -will try again to make a settlement there."</p> - -<p>The very next year he sent out a still larger -number of people. There were men, women and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">72</a></span> -children. When they reached the island where -the first settlers had lived, they found the English -fort had been destroyed. Deer were roaming freely -through the deserted village.</p> - -<p>They did not lose heart. They set to work and -new houses were soon built. They tried to make -friends with the Indians.</p> - -<p>At this time a dear little baby was born. She -was named Virginia in honor of the queen and of -her parents' new home. She was the first white -child of English people born in this great land of -America.</p> - -<p>Poor little Virginia Dare! You shall now -hear her sad story. Her grandfather was the governor -of the English settlement. After a while he -said to his people:</p> - -<p>"I will sail back to England to get help, for -the Indians are not friendly to us."</p> - -<p>He was gone a long time—much longer than -he expected to be. When he reached England he -found that war was going on, and Raleigh was -busy fighting for his country.</p> - -<p>Two ships, however, were loaded with supplies -and started to America. Alas! they had not gone<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">73</a></span> -far before they had a fight with the Spaniards and -were obliged to go back to England.</p> - -<p>It was three years before Virginia's grandfather -was able to cross the ocean again. What long, -anxious years they must have been!</p> - -<p>When he reached Virginia there was not one of -his people to greet him; no daughter to meet him -with smiles and kisses; no little grandchild to sit -on his knee and put her arms around his neck.</p> - -<p>All were gone—the fort, the village, men, women, -and children. He looked about for a sign of what -had happened. This only met his eyes: It was -a tree into which these letters had been hurriedly -cut:</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p1t p1b">C-R-O-A-T-A-N</p> - - -<p>What was the meaning of these letters? Was -it to let him know that the white people could be -found among the Croatan Indians? Had they been -made prisoners by that tribe of Red Men? He -went to them and to other tribes in the country -around, but he was not able to learn anything about -his lost dear ones. At last he went back to England -with a sad heart.</p> - -<p>No one knows to this day whether Virginia Dare -was killed by the Red Men or whether she lived<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">74</a></span> -to grow up among their children and learn their -ways and language. She and her people are spoken -of to-day as "The Lost Colony."</p> - -<p>When Sir Walter Raleigh heard the sad news -he was discouraged. He had spent all his money -and still had no colony. Queen Elizabeth died -a few years after this. King James, who now -ruled over England, was not his friend.</p> - -<p>The king kept the brave knight in prison for -twelve long years. At last he ordered the good -Sir Walter Raleigh's head to be cut off.</p> - -<p>This was the end of that brave Englishman, after -a life of good and noble deeds.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">75</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER VI<br /> -<span class="small">THE STORY OF A DARING MAN</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"What</span> a pity no one knows what became of -little Virginia Dare," said Lucy, sadly. -"I hope she wasn't killed by the Indians. I'd rather -think she died of the measles or scarlet fever."</p> - -<p>"Poor little child," said Uncle Sam softly. "It -must have been a rough life for her in the wild -woods of the New World at that time, even if the -cruel savages had let her alone. My heart goes -out also to Sir Walter Raleigh, for he worked so -hard to have English people settle here. The saddest -part of it is that he did not succeed.</p> - -<p>"He lived long enough, however, to hear of other -people going to Virginia and making a home there. -They would surely have failed, too, if it had not -been for Captain John Smith."</p> - -<p>"What a common name that is," said Joe. "I -know two boys named John Smith."</p> - -<p>"A common enough name, to be sure," answered -Uncle Sam. "But the John Smith I am thinking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">76</a></span> -of was very different from any other. If you children -can stay long enough this evening, I will -tell you about him."</p> - -<p>"Mother said we needn't come home till eight -o'clock unless you got tired of us before that time."</p> - -<p>"The idea of my getting tired of you and Joe, -Lucy! I would be a lonely old man if it were -not for you children. You help to keep me young. -I can't think what I should do, either, if I had no -one to listen to the stories that keep running through -my head. Just now it is fairly bursting with the -brave deeds of John Smith."</p> - -<p>"Dear me! Don't let it burst, Uncle Sam. Do -begin the story this very minute," cried Lucy, trying -to look frightened.</p> - -<p>A moment afterward the little sitting-room was -so still that anyone could have heard the big clock -ticking in the corner. Then Uncle Sam began -to tell of the strange life of</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p2t p1b">CAPTAIN JOHN SMITH</p> - -<p>Once upon a time there was a little boy who lived -on a farm in England.</p> - -<p>When he was born his father and mother said, -"We will call our son John."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">77</a></span></p> - -<p>As soon as he was old enough he was set to work -at a trade. His parents were poor and they thought, -"It is a good thing to have a trade, for then a man -can always get his own living."</p> - -<p>The young John Smith could not agree with -them. He did not like his work, so he did what -other boys sometimes do. He ran away. Then -his troubles began, for he had a hard life. He -tried all sorts of things.</p> - -<p>He became a soldier and later he went to sea and -was out in such a terrible storm that his ship was -wrecked. Again he was out in a ship when another -storm came up.</p> - -<p>"John Smith carries bad luck wherever he goes," -the men whispered to each other. "He has brought -this storm upon us."</p> - -<p>They threw him overboard. As he was a good -swimmer and not far from land, he managed to -reach the shore in safety.</p> - -<p>This is only one of the stories John Smith told -of his strange life when he was a young man.</p> - -<p>Not long after that adventure he took part in -a war against the Turks. He was as brave as -ever, for at one time he killed three Turks and cut<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">78</a></span> -off their heads. He had no one to help him do it, -either.</p> - -<p>He did not succeed as well afterwards, for the -Turks caught him and made him a slave. His -cruel master fastened an iron collar around his neck -and made him work very hard. He had to thresh -wheat.</p> - -<p>One day when he was working in the wheat field -his Turkish master rode up on horseback and began -to whip him. How angry he was! He seized -his heavy flail and killed the Turk with one blow.</p> - -<p>He must lose no time in getting away now. He -lifted a bag of wheat to the back of the horse, -jumped up behind it, and off he rode as fast as he -could go.</p> - -<p>He wandered through the wilderness for a long -time. At last he reached the seashore and got on -board an English ship. When he reached England -there were many people ready to listen to his -wonderful adventures.</p> - -<p>On the other hand, John Smith heard many -stories about the land across the great ocean—of -little Virginia Dare and her lost people, and of -the Red Men who lived such a free life in the forests<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">79</a></span> -of America. This was not all, however, for -people were saying:</p> - -<p>"Why not try again to settle in Virginia? It -is a beautiful country. The weather is warm and -pleasant there. It must be easy enough to live -in such a place, if we can only get along with the -Indians."</p> - -<p>John Smith eagerly listened to all this talk. England -was too quiet for him. He did not enjoy his -life there, he liked excitement too well. He said:</p> - -<p>"If a party sails to Virginia I should like to -join it."</p> - -<p>He soon had a chance, for a number of men -were at that time getting ready to start. They -were not the best kind of people to make a new -home in a strange land. Very few of them knew -how to do any kind of work. They had heard -that the Spaniards found gold in America. They -thought they themselves might pick it up on the -ground in Virginia. They said to each other:</p> - -<p>"We will get rich in the easiest way in the -world."</p> - -<p>They did not know how hard work it would be -to make themselves safe, as well as comfortable.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">80</a></span></p> - -<p>They settled at a place they called Jamestown, -in honor of James, the king of England.</p> - -<p>When the Red Men saw these newcomers, they -were not pleased. They were not willing to have -the Englishmen settle in their country. They said:</p> - -<p>"We will kill these white men before they have a -chance to save themselves."</p> - -<p>The English were taken by surprise. They did -not have their guns with them when the Indians -drew near with their bows and arrows. It would -have been a sad day for John Smith and his party -if the Indians had not been frightened off.</p> - -<p>Something came whizzing over their heads. The -next moment the branch of a tree came tumbling -down in the midst of them.</p> - -<p>"It is thunder," they thought. "The Great -Spirit is angry with us."</p> - -<p>They fled from the place as fast as their legs -would carry them. They did not stop to look -around to see what had happened. If they had -seen, they would not have understood.</p> - -<p>But the white men knew. Some of their friends -on board of the ship had seen their danger. They -had fired a cross-bar shot from a cannon. That -was a bar of iron with a cannon-ball at each end.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">81</a></span> -Such shot are not allowed to be used now-a-days.</p> - -<p>Although John Smith and his friends were saved -at this time, many other troubles were waiting for -them.</p> - -<p>They made some houses to live in, but made -them so poorly that they leaked and were very -damp. They had brought food with them, but -there was not enough to last long. It is not strange -that many of the party became sick and died.</p> - -<p>Those who still lived looked at the gardens of the -Indians with a great longing. They watched the -fields of corn waving in the breeze, and when it was -ripe they tried to buy the grain.</p> - -<p>They could not get it by offering money to the -Red Men, for the savages had no use for money—that -is, for our kind of money. John Smith said -to his people:</p> - -<p>"I will tell you what I will do. I will take some -beads and other cheap trinkets and will go up the -river in a boat. I can surely get some corn if I -am willing to give the trinkets in return."</p> - -<p>When the Indians saw the beads, bits of looking-glass, -and other ornaments, they longed to have -them. They wanted them so much that they gladly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">82</a></span> -gave Smith a boatload of corn. In this way he -saved his people from sickness and death.</p> - -<p>These white men called themselves "gentlemen." -They had never done any work in England. John -Smith showed them they could only save their -lives by work. It must be hard work, too.</p> - -<p>If it had not been for him they would not have -known enough even to build their houses. He -taught them how to plough the ground and plant -corn so as to raise a crop for themselves. He said -to them:</p> - -<p>"We ought to protect our settlement by setting -up a wall of stakes around it."</p> - -<p>Such a wall is called a palisade. It would have -been helpful in keeping their enemies away. The -wall was not built, however. The men were lazy -and they thought:</p> - -<p>"Captain Smith cannot be right. We are able -to defend ourselves without any palisade."</p> - -<p>King James very much wished the settlers to -look for three things. They were to search for -Virginia Dare and her people; they must find gold, -and they were also to look for some waterway -through the land leading to the Pacific Ocean, or -the South Sea, as it was then called.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">83</a></span></p> - -<p>It was more than a hundred years since Columbus -discovered America. Yet still no one dreamed -of the size of this country. How surprised John -Smith and his people would have been to learn -that they would have to travel three thousand miles -westward before they reached another ocean.</p> - -<p>As soon as Captain Smith had a chance he sailed -along the shores and up the rivers. He was looking -for a way to reach the South Sea. One day he -went up the James River in a boat with two of his -friends. They came to another and smaller river -flowing into the James.</p> - -<p>"Let us see where this will carry us," said Smith.</p> - -<p>They went on and on. The river became narrower -and narrower. At last Smith jumped ashore and -left the other two men in charge of the boat. He -told them to guard it and on no account to leave it -for a minute. He would go inland to see what -he could find.</p> - -<p>He had not gone far when some Indians crept -out of the woods. They took the two men by surprise -and killed them. Then the savages hurried -after Smith. He fought hard and managed to -make a prisoner of one of the Indians.</p> - -<p>Quick as a flash, he bound his prisoner in front<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">84</a></span> -of him. In this way he made a shield for himself. -The Indians could not shoot at the white man without -running the risk of killing one of their own -people.</p> - -<p>By this time they had driven Smith into a swamp. -The brave man was sinking deeper and deeper into -the mud. It was not long before he sank up to his -waist in it. He could no longer run nor fight. He -would have to give himself up.</p> - -<p>He made a sign to his enemies that he would let -them take him.</p> - -<p>Even after they had taken him ashore he had -hope. With quick thought he drew a small compass -from his pocket and offered it to the leader of -the party. He told the Indian to look at the needle. -He showed how it pointed. He explained that -anyone who carried it could tell in what direction -he was going.</p> - -<p>The savage was so pleased that he would not let -the others do Smith any harm. They started for -their home with their prisoner. They did not travel -like white men. They walked in single file and -made no noise.</p> - -<p>They carried Smith to several Indian villages. -Everyone was curious to see him. Many of their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">85</a></span> -people had never looked at a white man before. -They said to each other:</p> - -<p>"Is he a friend or an enemy to us? He is certainly -very wise and brave."</p> - -<p>They looked at the compass and saw that it would -really tell directions. They thought:</p> - -<p>"No common man could have such a wonderful -thing as that."</p> - -<p>Smith wrote a letter to his friends in Jamestown -and asked the Indians to send it to them. When -the Red Men had done this and found that those -queer marks on a piece of paper told a story to the -white men, they were even more surprised. They -said:</p> - -<p>"We do not dare to kill our prisoner, he is too -powerful."</p> - -<p>What should they do with him? While they -were trying to make up their minds about this, they -kept Smith shut up in a hut. They were not cruel -to him, however. O, no. They brought him -quantities of food to eat. There were bread made -of corn, roasted deer meat, and all the dainties -which they themselves liked best. Smith thought:</p> - -<p>"They are trying to make me fat before they -kill me."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">86</a></span></p> - -<p>This thought took away all wish for food. The -poor man could scarcely eat.</p> - -<p>Day after day went by until at last the Red Men -said:</p> - -<p>"We will take our prisoner to the great chief, -Powhatan, and he will tell us what to do."</p> - -<p>Smith was brought out and carried in a strange -procession to the village in which the chief was -then living. He was kept there for some time before -the chief would receive him.</p> - -<p>When the day came at last, Powhatan was dressed -in the grandest Indian fashion. He wore a long -robe made of feathers. His face and arms were -painted. His people stood around him. He -wished Smith to think he was great and powerful.</p> - -<p>The white man was brought before him. Smith -eagerly watched to see if there were any signs -of mercy in the stern face.</p> - -<p>Powhatan talked for some time with his warriors. -Then two of them got up and went to the -side of their white prisoner.</p> - -<p>They led him off a short distance and stretched -him out on the ground. They placed his head on -a stone.</p> - -<p>"They are going to kill me," Smith said to himself.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">87</a></span> -"I am bound so tightly I cannot possibly get -away. There is no help for me now."</p> - -<p>Then a strange thing happened. Just as one -of the Indians raised his club to end the white man's -life, a young girl rushed to his side. She was Powhatan's -favorite daughter. She threw her arms -around Smith's neck. Then, turning toward her -father, she cried:</p> - -<p>"Spare this man's life for my sake."</p> - -<p>The beautiful girl had grown to love Smith during -his stay in the village. While he was shut up -as a prisoner he had made whistles and strings of -beads for her. His kindness pleased her and her -gentle heart was filled with pity for the white man.</p> - -<p>Powhatan could not refuse the daughter he loved -so dearly. He said:</p> - -<p>"I will spare the man's life for the sake of my -child. He shall stay among us and spend his time -making ornaments for Pocahontas."</p> - -<p>This is the story Smith afterwards told of the -time when he was in the hands of the Indians. -Some people, however, do not believe it is quite all -true.</p> - -<p>At any rate, his life was saved and Pocahontas -was the friend of the white people ever after.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">88</a></span></p> - -<p>In a few weeks Powhatan said to John Smith:</p> - -<p>"You may go back to Jamestown if you will -promise to send me two cannons and a grindstone -as soon as you arrive."</p> - -<p>Smith was quite willing to make the promise.</p> - -<p>When he was once more safe among his own -people he found they were in great trouble. Some -of them were planning to run away in the only -large boat. The others would then be left to the -mercy of the Red Men. They were all much in -need of their wise leader.</p> - -<p>The promise to Powhatan was not forgotten. -The Indians, however, who had come back with -Smith to get the cannons and the grindstone could -not carry them home. They were too heavy. So -the men were quite willing to take some trinkets -instead.</p> - -<p>Many times after that the people of Jamestown -suffered because they did not have enough to eat. -They were saved again and again by Pocahontas, -who filled her boat with baskets of corn and paddled -down the river to her white friends.</p> - -<p>One evening she heard her people making a plan. -They said:</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">89</a></span></p> - -<p>"We will creep upon the Englishmen and take -them by surprise. Then we will kill them."</p> - -<p>She was brave as well as good. She did not lose -a moment, but hurried away through the dark -woods. She did not stop till she reached Jamestown. -Then she told of the Indians' plot. She -warned Smith to be on his guard. Then she hurried -away into the darkness once more.</p> - -<p>The white men tried again and again to make -friends with Powhatan. They gave him a bedstead, -a red cloak, and a wash-basin. They -thought he would now be willing to sell them corn.</p> - -<p>Not so, however. After he received these presents, -the great chief became so proud he would not -think of trading with the Englishmen.</p> - -<p>They were almost starving when Smith thought -of a new plan. He took a box of blue glass beads -and showed them to Powhatan. He said:</p> - -<p>"These beads are made of the same stuff as the -sky itself."</p> - -<p>When the chief heard this he longed to have some -for his own. What precious things they must be!</p> - -<p>"I will sell you a boatload of corn for those -beads," he promised.</p> - -<p>"You will see by this that Captain Smith did not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">90</a></span> -always tell the truth. It was because of just such -deceits as this that the white men afterwards had -so much trouble with the Indians," said Uncle Sam.</p> - -<p>The corn was just what Smith wanted, but he -would not let the savages know how glad he was. -His boat was quickly filled with the precious grain -and he set out for Jamestown with a happy heart.</p> - -<p>His troubles were not yet at an end. One day -while he was at work, a bag of gunpowder exploded -near him. Poor Captain Smith was badly burned -and in great pain. Worse still, the burned flesh -did not heal after many days.</p> - -<p>"I cannot get well here. I must go back to -England," he told his friends.</p> - -<p>With a sad heart he bade them good-bye and -left them to get along as well as they could by -themselves.</p> - -<p>When Captain John Smith had gone, one trouble -after another fell upon the people of Jamestown. -They came near starving to death. They -were glad to eat anything which would keep them -alive. Dogs, snakes, and even toads were killed -for food.</p> - -<p>Most of the men had already died when some -ships came sailing into the harbor. They brought<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">91</a></span> -some more settlers, as well as food and clothing -from England. The worst was now over.</p> - -<p>Pocahontas was still the friend of the white men. -She grew up to be a beautiful young woman and -married an Englishman named John Rolfe. The -wedding took place in a little church at Jamestown.</p> - -<p>From that time the great chief Powhatan was -the friend of the white men.</p> - -<p>The rest of the story of Pocahontas is soon told. -She was a good wife to John Rolfe, and a year -after they were married they had a lovely baby boy. -John Rolfe went to England on business and took -his wife and baby with him. The beautiful Pocahontas -was invited to court by the king. She -was treated with great honor as an Indian princess, -but it did not make her vain or silly.</p> - -<p>While she was in England she met her old friend -John Smith. She had been told that he was dead -and she was much moved at seeing him.</p> - -<p>Alas! Pocahontas did not live to see her own -home again. Just as she was about to sail to -America a dreadful sickness came up her. It was -the smallpox. She died in a few days, but her -baby son went back with his father to Jamestown -and lived to be a noble man.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">92</a></span></p> - -<p>John Smith is often called the father of Virginia. -After his burns had healed, he left England in -search of new adventures.</p> - -<p>He sailed again to the shores of America. He -came to a place much farther north than Jamestown. -He looked upon a land with rocky shores. -It was not like Virginia. He called this part of -America "New England" and so it has been called -ever since.</p> - -<p>Smith sailed all along the shores of New England. -He went in and out of its bays and harbors. -He made a good map of what he saw. Then -he went back to his own country to show his map -to the king.</p> - -<p>The next year he sailed on his last voyage. This -time he wished to settle in New England. He -met with many troubles. There was a dreadful -storm and he was chased by pirates. Last of all, -he was overtaken by a fleet of French ships and -made a prisoner. After a while he managed to -escape and get back to England.</p> - -<p>This brave and daring man lived long enough to -hear of other people settling in New England. That -is another story, however.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">93</a></span></p> - -<p>As Uncle Sam stopped speaking, Joe jumped up, -crying:</p> - -<p>"Hurrah for Captain John Smith! Next to -Columbus he was the bravest man I ever heard -of. I wish I could have seen him kill that Turk."</p> - -<p>"I should have liked to have been there when he -offered those blue beads to Powhatan," said Lucy. -"He must have been laughing inside when he did -it."</p> - -<p>"As for me, I like to think of his making those -lazy Englishmen do some work," said Uncle Sam, -stroking his chin.</p> - -<p>The neighbors all said there was no laziness about -Uncle Sam, so it is no wonder he spoke as he did.</p> - -<p>"Uncle Sam is like John Smith in some ways," -the children's father said not long afterwards.</p> - -<p>He had come into the back yard where Joe was -stretched on the ground with Lucy's arms around -his neck.</p> - -<p>"We are playing that I am John Smith and Lucy -is Pocahontas. She is trying to save my life. Uncle -Sam told us all about them." Joe sat up to -explain.</p> - -<p>"Yes, Uncle Sam is a good deal like John Smith. -He is afraid of nothing. He is always busy, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">94</a></span> -he can turn his hand to anything. One time when -he was a boy he was out sailing. The sail was -an old one and a sudden gust of wind caught it -and tore it badly. Uncle Sam was a long way -from home and the sun was already setting. Quick -as a thought he took off his shirt, tore it open, and -patched the sail with it. That was the very thing -John Smith did when he was away from Jamestown -on one of his excursions."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">95</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER VII<br /> -<span class="small">HENRY HUDSON</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"Listen</span>! That is thunder, Uncle Sam. I'm -afraid we are going to have a storm. I -wish I had covers to my ears so I couldn't hear that -dreadful rumbling."</p> - -<p>"Nonsense, Lucy. There is no use in being -afraid of anything. You should have lived long -ago among the Dutchmen in New York. They -would have told you it wasn't thunder, but was -the sound made by Henry Hudson and his men -as they played ninepins with the dwarfs in the -caves of the Catskill mountains.</p> - -<p>"But there! You don't know anything about -Henry Hudson. Sit down, dear, in that little chair -close to me and turn your back to the window. -Then you will not see the lightning. I will tell -you such a nice story you will not listen to the -thunder, either."</p> - -<p>"I ought not to be afraid with you, Uncle Sam. -I wish Joe were here, though. He would like to -hear the story."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">96</a></span></p> - -<p>"I will tell it to him some other time, Lucy. Or -you may tell him yourself. But here he comes -now, just in time."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam leaned back in his armchair, pulled -the beard on his chin, and began the story of</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p2t p1b">HENRY HUDSON AND THE DUTCHMEN</p> - -<p>It is nearly three hundred years since John Smith -went to Jamestown. He left a dear friend in England -who was also a great sea captain. His name -was Henry Hudson.</p> - -<p>At that time England was jealous of Spain because -of her riches. The Spaniards had found -many gold and silver mines in America.</p> - -<p>England was also jealous of Portugal, a small -country joining Spain. The Portuguese had found -a way of reaching India by sailing southward -around Africa and then eastward. They brought -home shiploads of gums, spices, precious stones -and rare woods. So the Englishmen thought:</p> - -<p>"We must get rich, too. Why cannot we reach -India by sailing to the northeast or the northwest?"</p> - -<p>They looked about for a brave and able captain -who should find out if this could be done. They -chose Henry Hudson.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">97</a></span></p> - -<p>He sailed into the northern seas. He met with -icebergs that made the air very cold when they -were still a long way off. He saw many whales.</p> - -<p>Henry Hudson and his men killed some of the -whales. They boiled the fat and made many barrels -of oil. This was the best oil known at that -time for burning in lamps. It was also useful in -other ways.</p> - -<p>The brave captain sailed far into the northern -seas. It was now so cold that great masses of ice -almost stopped the ship.</p> - -<p>"We must turn back," Henry Hudson said to his -men. "It is of no use to sail any farther northward -in hopes of finding a passage to India."</p> - -<p>When he got back to England, the people were -pleased to learn about the whales. They sent more -ships to capture the great monsters and bring home -the oil.</p> - -<p>Once more they sent Henry Hudson to look for -a short way to India by a northern passage.</p> - -<p>Again he failed because of the ice in the waters, -and again he came home disappointed.</p> - -<p>About this time the people of Holland heard -of Henry Hudson and what he was trying to do. -People who live in that country are called Dutch<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">98</a></span> -or Dutchmen. It was a rich country for so few people. -They said:</p> - -<p>"We had better send for this English captain. -We will get him to sail in our ships. We do not -wish the Englishmen to find a shorter way to India -than we know now. If they do, they will become -richer than we are."</p> - -<p>So they sent for Hudson. They offered him -such good pay that he went to Holland and made -ready to take one of their ships into the north. As -he was about to sail he received a letter from his -old friend John Smith.</p> - -<p>The letter told him he should sail to the westward -if he wished to find the best way of reaching India. -Just north of Virginia there was a narrow strait. -If a ship passed through that strait, it would enter -the ocean that washes the shores of India.</p> - -<p>We all know now that Captain John Smith was -wrong about this. But Henry Hudson thought it -must be true.</p> - -<p>He turned his ship, the Half Moon, towards the -west. He sailed in that direction till he reached -the shores of Newfoundland. Then he went southward -as far as Virginia, keeping near the coast. -He now turned his ship about and slowly sailed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">99</a></span> -to the north. He entered many of the bays and -coves that reached into the land. He was always -on the lookout for the strait of which Smith had -written.</p> - -<p>At last he sailed into a fine harbor which no -white men had ever seen before. We call it to-day -the harbor of New York and know it is one of the -best in the world.</p> - -<p>Indians came down to the shore in crowds. They -were curious to see the strange-looking boat and -the people with the white faces and hands. The -Red Men wore feather cloaks and necklaces of copper. -They wished to make friends with their -visitors and offered them beans, oysters, and tobacco.</p> - -<p>"What a beautiful country this is!" the white -men thought.</p> - -<p>There were sweet smells in the air and the open -places along the shore were covered with grass -and flowers. The ship did not remain long in the -harbor. Hudson found he was at the mouth of -a river. He thought:</p> - -<p>"Who knows but that if I follow this river I may -reach the Pacific Ocean?"</p> - -<p>So the ship sailed farther and farther up the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">100</a></span> -river. It stopped at several places where friendly -Indians came out to meet the white men. Hudson -landed at one of these places and visited an Indian -chief.</p> - -<p>In the village he saw great piles of corn and -beans. He noticed the bark houses. The Red -Men asked him to stay all night with them and -placed a mat on the ground for him to sit on. They -brought him food in a red wooden bowl.</p> - -<p>They wished to show that they were truly his -friends, so they took some arrows and threw them -into the fire. This told him more than the Indian -words he could not understand.</p> - -<p>When he sailed again, Hudson noticed that the -river was getting narrower. At last it was so -shallow that his ship could go no farther. He -sent some men in a small boat to see what they -could find.</p> - -<p>"This is no way to the Pacific," they said when -they came back. "The river comes to an end just -beyond us."</p> - -<p>The ship was turned about, and Hudson sailed -down the river and out into the harbor again. -He gave his own name to the river he had discovered,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">101</a></span> -and it is still called the Hudson River. -He never saw it again.</p> - -<p>Now came the long voyage across the ocean. -The Dutch people were sorry that Hudson had not -found what he was looking for. They were pleased, -however, to learn of the lovely country and the -wild animals covered with fur that were to be -found in its forests.</p> - -<p>"The Indians are pleasant and willing to be -friends. They kill great numbers of the wild animals -with their bows and arrows and they tan the -skins." So the sailors said.</p> - -<p>"Why not send some of our people to live on -the shores of the Hudson River?" thought the -thrifty Dutch. "They can carry with them shiploads -of knives, axes, beads, and other things the -Red Men like. They can trade those things for -the furs that bring high prices here in Europe."</p> - -<p>This is how it happened that the Dutch people -came to settle in America.</p> - -<p>They brought chests full of linen, as well as the -shining pewter dishes they used in housekeeping. -In fact, they packed in their ships everything they -needed to make themselves comfortable and happy.</p> - -<p>When they built their houses in America they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">102</a></span> -made them look as much as possible like the homes -they left behind them. They made their fireplaces -large enough to hold logs of great size. In the -cold winter evenings these logs crackled and burned -brightly while the Dutchmen with their wives and -children sat before the fire and told stories.</p> - -<p>Every house had a porch. As the sun set and -the moon came out in the summer time, the men -sat in the porches telling stories and smoking their -pipes while their wives sat knitting beside them -and the children romped and played around the -dooryards.</p> - -<p>They still dressed in the fashions of their country. -The men had hats with broad brims and coats -with wide skirts. The women wore so many short -skirts they looked like opened umbrellas.</p> - -<p>These Dutch people were honest and they had -kind hearts, so they got along pretty well with -their Indian neighbors. They hated idleness and -they were very neat.</p> - -<p>All of them worked during the day, but when -evening came it was a time for rest and pleasure. -Then were told the stories of the old days in Holland, -of fairies, and of the gnomes who lived underground -digging copper and gold.</p> - - -<div class="figcenter"> - <img src="images/i_102.jpg" alt="Children" /> - <div class="caption"> - <span class="small">THE DUTCH CHILDREN AT PLAY</span> - </div> -</div> - - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">103</a></span></p> - -<p>When the thunder rolled in the sky, they would -nod to each other and say: "It is only Henry Hudson -and his men playing ninepins with the dwarfs -in the caves of the Catskill mountains."</p> - -<p>You shall now hear how this queer fancy came -into their heads.</p> - -<p>After the brave captain had discovered the Hudson -River and gone back to Europe, he tried once -more to find a short way to India. He thought -it best to cross the ocean again, but to sail farther -north than he had done on his first voyage to this -country.</p> - -<p>After he had reached the shores of America, he -came into a large bay. The land around him was -bare and dreary. The ship was kept all winter in -this bay on account of the ice. The sailors suffered -very much from the bitter cold. Many of -them became sick and died before the spring opened -and the ice broke up enough to let the ship move on.</p> - -<p>By this time the food was almost gone. The -day came when Hudson took the last of the bread -and divided it among his crew. He was so sad -and hopeless that tears filled his eyes.</p> - -<p>The sailors blamed him for bringing them there<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">104</a></span> -and were very angry with him. They thought, "We -shall all lose our lives through him."</p> - -<p>They were not even moved by his tears. When -they had eaten the bread, they seized him and put -him and some sick sailors into a small boat. Then -they sent them adrift in the cold, dreary waters -of the great bay.</p> - -<p>They were never heard of again. This is all we -know of the last days of that very brave Englishman, -Captain Henry Hudson.</p> - -<p>As for the wicked sailors, some of them met with -better fortune than they deserved. Soon after they -had treated their captain so badly, birds came flying -by. The men shot some of these and saved themselves -from starving. After that they had a fight -with Indians on the shore and several of the sailors -were killed. The others managed to gather a small -supply of food with which they started for home.</p> - -<p>Even then they suffered a great deal from hunger. -They were so weak they had to sit down to -sail the vessel. All of them would have died if -they had not met another ship, which took them -aboard and carried them home.</p> - -<p>Long before Uncle Sam had finished the story, -the thunder-storm had passed by.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">105</a></span></p> - -<p>"I hardly noticed it. I was thinking all the -time about Henry Hudson," declared Lucy.</p> - -<p>"I suppose Hudson never met his old friend John -Smith after he got the letter," said Uncle Sam, -thoughtfully. Then he went on, "They were both -Englishmen, yet those who settled in Virginia -with John Smith made a very different home for -themselves from those made by the Dutch who -followed Henry Hudson.</p> - -<p>"The Dutch had their own ways; the English -had theirs. The Dutch planted gardens. They -raised flocks of sheep, which furnished wool for -the women to card and spin. They gave beads -and blankets of red wool to their Indian neighbors. -They took in return game and beautiful -furs. They sent the furs to Holland.</p> - -<p>"They got up in the morning at sunrise, and -went to bed at sunset. They ate dinner at eleven -o'clock in the morning, and tea parties were often -given at three in the afternoon.</p> - -<p>"They had grand times at Christmas and New -Year's, when feasts were spread and everyone -dressed in his best clothes.</p> - -<p>"It was the Dutchmen who gave Santa Claus -to American children. They brought the dear old<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">106</a></span> -fellow from Holland along with their chests of -linen and pewter dishes."</p> - -<p>"Hurrah for the Dutchmen! I say," exclaimed -Joe. "Christmas wouldn't be half the fun it is -without Santa Claus. Do you know, Uncle Sam, -last year was the first time Lucy and I knew he was -not a real man. Why, we used to think he came -down our chimney every Christmas Eve with his -pack of presents. We talked up the chimney to -him when we went to bed and told him what we -wanted. I know now that you and father and -mother are the only Santa Claus."</p> - -<p>"Now I think of it, the pictures of Santa Claus -make him look like a fat and jolly old Dutchman," -said Lucy.</p> - -<p>"After their people were well settled, the children -of Virginia enjoyed Christmas," Uncle Sam -went on. "They lived on big plantations where -their fathers raised tobacco. The houses were large -and pleasant. Beautiful trees grew near and gave -plenty of shade in the hot summer time.</p> - -<p>"At Christmas, wild turkeys were roasted in the -big fireplaces. The rooms were trimmed with holly -and evergreens. There were dinner parties, and -dances that lasted all night. The ladies wore flowered<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">107</a></span> -silk dresses with long trains. Their hair was -powdered and 'done up' on the head so it looked -like a tower. The men wore knee-breeches and -shoes with bright buckles. Their coats were of -silk or velvet and trimmed with much gold and -silver lace.</p> - -<p>"The white people in Virginia did not work -hard. They made their black slaves care for the -great fields of tobacco.</p> - -<p>"'Where did the black men come from?' I see -the question in Lucy's eyes."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam stopped for a moment to stroke his -chin and slyly pull Joe's hair, for the boy had turned -his head to look at his sister.</p> - -<p>"Ouch! That isn't fair, Uncle Sam," cried Joe. -"I will try to forgive you, though, if you don't do it -again and go on with your story."</p> - -<p>"The Dutch were the first ones to bring slaves -to Virginia. They sailed to Africa and caught -the poor savages in their homes. Then they carried -them on board ship and afterwards sold them -to the white planters in America. That is one -way the Dutch became rich.</p> - -<p>"You may praise the Dutch for giving you Santa -Claus, Joe. You may blame them, however, for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">108</a></span> -being the first to bring the dreadful curse of slavery -to this beautiful land."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam was getting excited.</p> - -<p>"We may thank the Lord for sending us a good -helper. It is because of that helper that the people -of America are now free."</p> - -<p>The old man got up and made a deep bow before -a picture hanging above the organ.</p> - -<p>"There is the face of one who loved his fellow -men," he said, pointing to the picture.</p> - -<p>"When you children know a little more about -your country, you shall hear the story of Abraham -Lincoln."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">109</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER VIII<br /> -<span class="small">THE PILGRIMS</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"I</span> think mother cooks the best Thanksgiving -dinners in the world," said Joe, with a sleepy -yawn. "It seems as though I could never be -hungry again."</p> - -<p>"It is no wonder you feel as you do. I don't -see where in that small body of yours you were -able to stow away so much turkey and mince pie, -to say nothing of the squash and mashed potatoes, -the cranberry sauce, nuts and raisins," said Uncle -Sam. "I wonder if you ever thought why we -celebrate Thanksgiving Day. The people of other -countries do not have this holiday. If you are -not too sleepy I will tell you about it."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam had been spending the day with the -parents of Joe and Lucy. The children's mother -had said, "Thanksgiving wouldn't be Thanksgiving -without Uncle Sam to share it with us. Even if -my sister Mary comes with her whole family, we -can make room at the table for our dear old friend."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">110</a></span></p> - -<p>The great dinner had been eaten and cleared -away. The short day was coming to an end when -Uncle Sam spoke of a reason for Thanksgiving Day.</p> - -<p>"Sleepy! I guess not. A story is just the thing -before the lamps are lighted and we play games," -said Lucy.</p> - -<p>"Just the thing," repeated her cousin Mabel. -She was a year younger than Lucy and copied everything -the older girl said and did.</p> - -<p>"We all like stories," added Arthur, a tall boy -of ten years. He was quiet and fond of books—very -different from noisy Joe, who loved him the -best of all his cousins.</p> - -<p>"Once upon a time," began Uncle Sam, "there -were some people who lived in England. They -were good and honest, but they could not do just -as they wished. The king said everyone in the -country must worship God in a certain way. That -way must be the same in every church.</p> - -<p>"It happened that some of his people did not -agree with the king. They said: 'Everyone -ought to worship God, but all should be free to -worship in the way they like best.'</p> - -<p>"These people gathered together, and every Sunday -they met in their own little churches. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">111</a></span> -did not please the king and he made their lives -very unpleasant.</p> - -<p>"Of course they were not happy. They thought: -'Why should we stay here in England where we are -treated so badly? Holland is not far away and -the Dutch people are kind and friendly. They -are willing that everyone in their country should -worship as he likes. Let us go to Holland where -we can be free.'</p> - -<p>"The plan seemed good. A small company of -men, women and children left England for a home -among the Dutch.</p> - -<p>"At first, they were happy and contented in Holland. -The boys and girls became men and women. -The babies grew up into boys and girls. One thing -grieved their parents. Their children were fast -forgetting the English language. There were no -English schools where they could learn their lessons.</p> - -<p>"'This is not right,' said the older ones. 'No -people could be kinder than our Dutch friends, but -we do not wish our own children to grow up and -forget their own country and the beautiful English -language.'</p> - -<p>"'I will tell you what we can do,' said one. 'We<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">112</a></span> -have heard a good deal about America. Some of -our people have settled in Virginia. They write -that it is a fine place and that the air is soft and -pleasant all the year. Let us go to America. We -will seek a home not far from Virginia.'</p> - -<p>"The others thought these were wise words. -They left their Dutch friends and went back to -England. They wished to visit it once more before -they bade it good-bye forever.</p> - -<p>"Two ships were soon ready and one hundred -pilgrims sailed for America in the year 1620.</p> - -<p>"'We are like pilgrims,' they had said to each -other, 'for we travel from place to place.' From -that day to this they have been called by the name -of the 'Pilgrims.'</p> - -<p>"They had not sailed far before one of the ships -began to leak. Its captain said: 'It is not safe to -cross the ocean in such a poor boat.' So he turned -back to England.</p> - -<p>"All the Pilgrims now crowded into the second -ship. It was called the 'Mayflower.'</p> - -<p>"A long voyage was before the travelers. They -were tossed about by storm and wind. Almost all -of them were seasick. A hundred people in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">113</a></span> -small cabin of the Mayflower must surely have had -a hard time.</p> - -<p>"Land was sighted at last. It was their first -view of their future home, America. How happy -the children must have felt when they thought of -running and playing on dry land once more!</p> - -<p>"It was in November when they sailed around -the end of Cape Cod. The Pilgrims had not meant -to come so far north of Virginia.</p> - -<p>"Some of the men left the ship and went on -shore. They found a place where the earth looked -as though it had been lately dug up. Perhaps -something was buried in this spot. Sure enough! -It was some dried corn which the Indians had put -there for safe keeping.</p> - -<p>"The men were pleased at the goodly sight. They -carried the corn to the ship. 'We may have need -of it,' they said. They were honest people, so when -they afterwards found out what Indians had stored -the corn there, they paid for it quite willingly.</p> - -<p>"A brave man named Miles Standish had come -with the Pilgrims. He was English, like themselves. -They first met him while they were living -in Holland. He had gone there to help the Dutch -in a war against Spain.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">114</a></span></p> - -<p>"Miles Standish did not belong to the same -church as the Pilgrims, yet the more he knew them, -the better he liked them. When they spoke of -coming to America he said:</p> - -<p>"'I will go with you to your new home.'</p> - -<p>"They were much pleased, for he was a brave -and able soldier. He could help them if they had -trouble with the Indians.</p> - -<p>"After they found the corn, some one proposed -to go along the coast in a small boat. It would be -the best way of finding a place to settle. As they -moved along, they saw some huts covered with -mats. They thought these must be the homes of -Indians.</p> - -<p>"They went back to the ship without finding a -place to settle. Some days after that they started -out again. It was a very cold day in December. -The spray froze as it fell on their clothing.</p> - -<p>"When they were several miles from the ship -they landed and made ready to spend the night out -of doors. They built a wall of logs. They said:</p> - -<p>"'We can sleep behind this wall. Then if the -Indians should creep upon us, we can defend ourselves.'</p> - -<p>"They had no trouble during the night, but in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">115</a></span> -the morning there was a terrible sound. It was -not like anything they had ever heard before. It was -the warwhoop of the Indians.</p> - -<p>"'The guns!' They were in the boat where the -men had just carried them. There was a quick -rush to the shore, while arrows came whizzing -about their heads. Then 'Bang! bang!' went the -guns, and the frightened Indians ran back into -the woods.</p> - -<p>"The Indians thought the white men carried -thunder and lightning in the iron tubes. Although -brave, they could not stand against such fearful -weapons.</p> - -<p>"The explorers hastened away. After a while -they came into a small harbor. The land along -the shore had been cleared of woods. Brooks -flowed through it into the sea.</p> - -<p>"'This would be a good place for our people to -live,' Miles Standish thought. The others thought -so too.</p> - -<p>"John Smith had visited this very place before -and had marked it on his map. As soon as the men -came back, the ship set sail and brought the pilgrims -to the chosen spot.</p> - -<p>"'God's will has led us here,' thought the good<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">116</a></span> -people. 'It must be the best place for our new -home.'</p> - -<p>"One hundred persons had left England, but one -hundred and two landed on Plymouth Rock. How -was that?"</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam smiled as he looked at the faces of -the wondering children.</p> - -<p>"This was the way of it. Two babies had come -to the Pilgrims on their way to America. One -was born in mid-ocean, so they called him Oceanus. -The other was a little girl who first saw the daylight -when her people were near the shores of their -new home.</p> - -<p>"'We will name her Peregrine,' said her parents. -'Peregrine means wanderer, and she is a little wanderer, -without doubt.'</p> - -<p>"How good it must have seemed to the women -and children when they left the small, close cabin -and the dirty ship. They had to live on board, -however, until the men had built a long, rough -house on the hillside. The whole party would have -to live in this till better homes could be made for -each family.</p> - -<p>"Not long after the big house was done, the captain -of the ship said:</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">117</a></span></p> - -<p>"'I cannot wait around here any longer. I must -go back to England. Take all your goods from -my ship as quickly as possible.'"</p> - -<p>"I should think the Pilgrims would have hated -to see the ship leave," said Joe. "If they got homesick -they couldn't go back to England, no matter -how bad they felt."</p> - -<p>"They were not the kind of people to give up," -replied Uncle Sam. "Before they went on shore -they had a meeting in the cabin of the Mayflower. -They made some good laws for themselves. They -all promised to obey them. Those promises were -very helpful when troubles came.</p> - -<p>"And troubles did come, too! The first winter -at Plymouth, which was the name they gave their -new town, seemed to them long and very cold. It -was not really a very hard winter for <i>New</i> England, -but the climate from which they had come was -much milder. In <i>Old</i> England they were not used -to so much cold, snow and ice as they now had, and -they did not know how to protect themselves properly.</p> - -<p>"The food was poor and scarce. The one big -house was not made tight enough. The freezing -air, snow and rain came though the many cracks.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">118</a></span> -One brave Pilgrim after another was seized with -fever or other illness. Before the warm days of -spring came to cheer them one-half of them had -died. Alas! little baby Oceanus was one of these.</p> - -<p>"They did not sit still and think over their troubles. -Everyone who was able kept at work. The -men cut down trees in the forest with which to -build houses and a little church. They caught fish -and lobsters. They dug clams.</p> - -<p>"The women washed and cooked and spun, and -made everything as homelike as they could for their -husbands and children. The men carried their -muskets with them wherever they went. Miles -Standish had told them:</p> - -<p>"'We do not know when the Indians may take us -by surprise. We must be always ready.'</p> - -<p>"The very day when the Pilgrims first stepped -on Plymouth Rock they saw Indians peeking at -them from over the hilltop. That was all, however. -In a few minutes the Red Men were out of -sight. It was a long time before any of them -were seen again.</p> - -<p>"One day early in the spring the white men were -having a meeting to talk over some plans. Suddenly -an Indian came into their midst. He was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">119</a></span> -painted in the best style of his people. He wore a -bear-skin over his shoulders.</p> - -<p>"The men hastily seized their muskets. The -Indian calmly looked from one face to another. -He seemed in no hurry. Then he slowly said:</p> - -<p>"'Welcome, welcome, Englishmen!'</p> - -<p>"How good those words sounded! All were -filled with wonder and delight. They were puzzled -to think where this savage had learned English -words.</p> - -<p>"'Welcome, welcome, Indian.'</p> - -<p>"Then they led him to their house and gave him -a good dinner. Samoset, for that was his name, -seemed in no hurry to leave. He stayed hour after -hour. When night came the Pilgrims made up a -warm bed by the side of the fireplace. He slept -there all night, while the white men kept watch. -They were not yet sure whether he meant to be -their true friend. When morning came they gave -him some presents and he went away proud and -happy.</p> - -<p>"He soon came back, bringing with him his -friend Squanto and some other Indians.</p> - -<p>"Squanto could talk more English than Samoset. -He told the Pilgrims he had seen white men before<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">120</a></span> -and had lived with them. He had crossed the -great ocean with a white captain who came to -Plymouth with John Smith.</p> - -<p>"The white people had treated him kindly and -had afterwards brought him back to his old home. -It was the very place where the Pilgrims were now -living. When Squanto got back he found that his -family had all died of a dreadful sickness. Many -of his tribe had died from it at the same time. -That was why the others had burned their homes -and moved away from Plymouth.</p> - -<p>"Squanto was a good friend to the white men. -He came to live with them. He showed them how -to plant corn so it would grow well. He put a -dead fish in each hill to make the ground rich. He -taught them the Indian ways of hunting and fishing. -If it had not been for his kindness and knowledge -the rest of the Pilgrims might have died for want -of food.</p> - -<p>"'God has sent us this friend,' thought the good -people of Plymouth.</p> - -<p>"Not far away from them lived an Indian chief -named Massasoit. Squanto belonged to his tribe. -'We would like to see Massasoit,' said the chief men -of the Pilgrims. They thought they would be much<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">121</a></span> -safer from attack if they made peace with the Indian -chief who lived nearest them.</p> - -<p>"One day the great chief came to Plymouth. He -liked the white men. Before he went away he -promised to be friendly to them. Massasoit kept -his word and was a good and true friend to the Pilgrims -until he died.</p> - -<p>"One time news came to Plymouth that Massasoit -was very sick. Some of his white friends -went to see him. They found him stretched on a -rough bed in his little hut. He had a fever. The -hut was almost filled with Indians. The medicine -men were there. They were making a fearful -noise. They thought an evil spirit had taken hold -of Massasoit. They were trying to drive it away -with the noise. Then the chief would get well.</p> - -<p>"The Indians have great faith in their medicine -men. They are their priests, as well as their doctors.</p> - -<p>"'That noise is enough to make anyone ill,' said -the white men. 'The air in the hut is heavy and -very bad because there are so many people in it. -Massasoit can never get well at this rate.'</p> - -<p>"They got the crowd to leave the wigwam. -Then they gave the sick chief the proper medicine<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">122</a></span> -for his illness. The fever soon left the chief and he -believed that his white friends had saved his life.</p> - -<p>"One day an Indian who did not belong to Massasoit's -tribe came into Plymouth. He brought a -snake-skin filled with arrows and laid it on the -ground.</p> - -<p>"'What is the meaning of this?' thought the -chief men.</p> - -<p>"'It means war,' said Squanto. 'The Indians -who sent it are not your friends.'</p> - -<p>"The arrows were taken out of the snake-skin. -Then it was filled with bullets and sent back to the -unfriendly Indians.</p> - -<p>"This said as plainly as any words: 'If you come -to attack us with your arrows, we will shoot you -with our bullets.'</p> - -<p>"When the savages saw the bullets they were -afraid. They said, 'Ugh! Ugh!' but they did not -dare to touch them. They at once sent the fearful -things back to Plymouth. They changed their -minds about fighting white people who used firearms."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam stopped and looked around.</p> - -<p>"There's nothing like being brave," he said -slowly. "The Pilgrims would not even think of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">123</a></span> -giving up, and that is why they held out against all -dangers. You remember I told you that only half -of them lived through that first winter. They were -very careful not to let the savages know how many -of them had died. They were even careful not -to make mounds to mark the places where their -friends were buried. They thought the Red Men -might count the mounds. They would know by -that how few of the settlers were left.</p> - -<p>"As soon as the spring came, corn was planted -over the graveyard. The tall stalks were soon -waving to and fro, hiding it from sight."</p> - -<p>"Now the people were very busy. Gardens were -planted; fish and lobsters were caught in plenty, -and everyone was happy. In the summer wild -berries were to be had for the picking, and the -gardens which had been planted began to yield -nice vegetables.</p> - -<p>"Then came the beautiful days of the New England -autumn. The harvests ripened and fields of -corn seemed to cry:</p> - -<p>"'Come, gather the golden grain and store it -away for the cold days of winter.'</p> - -<p>"Squashes and pumpkins and other good things<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">124</a></span> -were ready for the picking. Men, women, and -children were busy and joyous.</p> - -<p>"When the governor looked on the glad sight, -he said:</p> - -<p>"'The Lord has blessed us. We should praise -Him for His mercy to us in this strange land.'</p> - -<p>"He set aside a day for prayer and thanksgiving. -Feasts should be spread and all work given -up. His orders were followed.</p> - -<p>"That was the first Thanksgiving Day in America.</p> - -<p>"What numbers of pies and puddings were made -for that day! What quantities of fish and wild -turkeys were brought by the men and cooked by the -women!</p> - -<p>"Thanksgiving morning came at last, and after -a good breakfast everyone went to church. In -those days not even the babies were left at home, -but were carried to church in their mothers' arms.</p> - -<p>"There was a long service in the church. A -very long one it must have seemed to the children, -who kept thinking of the great dinner to come soon. -The last hymn was sung, the last prayer made, and -all turned their steps to the tables loaded with good -things to eat and drink.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">125</a></span></p> - -<p>"The Pilgrims had invited Massasoit and some -of his people to share their feast. The Red Men -were pleased when they received the invitation.</p> - -<p>"'We will do our part,' they said.</p> - -<p>"They took their bows and arrows and went out -into the forest. They shot some red deer. Early -on Thanksgiving morning they arrived in Plymouth, -bringing the game they had killed.</p> - -<p>"When the great dinner was ready at last, one -hundred Indians with hungry stomachs were ready -to share it with the white people.</p> - -<p>"It must have been hard to entertain the visitors. -They could speak and understand only a few words -of English. Now and then they would give a deep -grunt to show they were well pleased.</p> - -<p>"They stayed not only to dinner, but to supper, -also. Even then they were in no hurry to go -home. Many of them spent the night with their -white friends. They seemed to think Plymouth -was a very pleasant place."</p> - -<p>It was quite dark outside before Uncle Sam finished -the story of the first Thanksgiving Day. But -big logs were burning in the fireplace and giving -a soft light all over the room. The old man could -see the children's happy faces. He knew they were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">126</a></span> -having a good time, though they had kept so quiet.</p> - -<p>"I am ready for blind-man's-buff," he said, suddenly -jumping up "I'll be the blind man. Come, -we have been still long enough."</p> - -<p>Lamps were quickly lighted. In a minute the -room was filled with the laughter of the Young -folks as Uncle Sam dashed right and left trying -to catch them in his long arms.</p> - -<p>"The little Pilgrims though they had a good -time on Thanksgiving Day. But their parents -would no let them make much noise. Dear me! -If children are not allowed to make a noise, they -can't be happy." Uncle Sam was talking to himself -as he walked home after the party.</p> - -<p>Just then his big black cat rubbed against his -legs. "Hullo, Buzz, is that you. And did you -think I was speaking to you? Here, smell of this -turkey bone. I brought it home so you could have -a feast, too."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam bent down and rubbed the cat's soft -fur. The he went into the house, leaving Buzz -outside to enjoy his Thanksgiving supper.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">127</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER IX<br /> -<span class="small">LITTLE PILGRIMS OF LONG AGO</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"Pop</span>! pop! pop!" went the corn as Joe shook -the popper over Uncle Sam's fire.</p> - -<p>"It is the very evening for roasted apples and -pop-corn," the old man said soon after his young -friends arrived. "Joe, you run down cellar and get -some of the biggest apples you can find. Lucy, -dear, take these ears of corn and shell them. We -will put the apples in the hot ashes and pop the -corn over those lovely red coals."</p> - -<p>"Oh, what fun!" cried Lucy. "You are always -thinking of the nicest things to do. I never knew -anyone like you."</p> - -<p>"I hope the Pilgrims had a few Uncle Sams with -them," said Joe, coming back with the apples.</p> - -<p>"They popped corn sometimes, but not in our -way," the old man said. "I don't believe anyone -of them ever saw a corn-popper. They used to -hide the kernels in the hot ashes and then watch for -them to come shooting out over the room.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">128</a></span></p> - -<p>"Then what fun there was as the children scrambled -to get them! They enjoyed it, and I am glad -they did. Poor little children, they did not have -too much fun at any time. You must not blame -their parents, though. They had been brought up -that way themselves. They thought they must be -very strict or their children might grow up to be -bad men and women.</p> - -<p>"'Spare the rod and spoil the child,' they said -over and over again. And they also often repeated -these words: 'Children should be seen and not -heard.'</p> - -<p>"Now I believe children should look forward to -Sunday with pleasure," Uncle Sam went on. "It -ought to be the best day in the week for everybody, -young and old. But, dear me! the poor little Pilgrims -had to keep so still and sober from Saturday -evening to Sunday evening, it must have been painful. -Not a loud word must be spoken, not a laugh -must be heard. Then there was the long sermon -Sunday morning. Hours long! Just think of it!</p> - -<p>"Rain or shine, heat or cold, everyone went to -church. That is, unless he was too sick to sit up. -They went in a sort of procession. The women and -children walked in the middle. Some of the men<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">129</a></span> -marched ahead and the rest at the end of the line. -They carried their guns, for they must be ready for -an attack by the savages at any moment.</p> - -<p>"There was no fire in the church on the coldest -day of winter. Some of the people carried foot-stoves -to keep themselves warm. These were iron -pans or cups in which live coals were carried. The -children sat in one part of the church and their parents -in another."</p> - -<p>Joe smiled.</p> - -<p>"I know what you are thinking," said Uncle Sam, -who noticed the smile. "You are thinking that the -children could whisper together during the long -sermon. That is a great mistake, Joe. There was -always a man in the church who looked out for such -things. He stood where he could see everything -that was going on. He had a long stick with a -squirrel tail on one end and a hard knob on the -other.</p> - -<p>"If he saw one of the older people nodding, softly -and quickly the 'tithing man', as he was called, -would be at the side of the erring one. Then the -furry end of the stick would dance over the sleepy -one's face and the eyes would open with a start.</p> - -<p>"But if a child began to whisper, he was not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">130</a></span> -treated so gently. The hard knob at the other end -of the stick would suddenly come down on his head -and make it ache in a very unpleasant way.</p> - -<p>"The Pilgrims had no clocks. They used hour-glasses -instead.</p> - -<p>"The tithing-man watched the hour-glass on the -pulpit. The moment the last grain of sand had fallen -through, he walked softly up the aisle and tipped the -glass over.</p> - -<p>"The hours in church must have passed very -slowly for the children. The sermon was very, very -long, and they could understand little of what the -minister said.</p> - -<p>"The poor children had no Santa Claus. Worse -even than that, they had no Christmas! Thanksgiving -was the only great holiday of the year."</p> - -<p>"No Christmas!" cried Joe and Lucy together.</p> - -<p>"Why, Uncle Sam," Joe went on, "Christmas is -the Christ Day. You know what I mean. And the -Pilgrims thought so much of the Bible and going to -church, and all that! Why, I don't understand."</p> - -<p>"They thought it was wrong to make a pleasure -of religious things," replied Uncle Sam. "It was -many, many years before the fashion of the Dutch -people spread over America. It is a grand fashion,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">131</a></span> -too. Well, well, we cannot help it if the Pilgrims -didn't celebrate Christmas, so we will turn from -that to the brave man whom the children admired -so much.</p> - -<p>"I shouldn't wonder if they were a little afraid -of Miles Standish. He had a wonderful sword -which he prized above everything else. A Turk had -given it to him. It was marked with strange figures -which the Pilgrims did not understand.</p> - -<p>"'That sword will save you from harm so long as -you keep it with you,' the Turk had told the brave -captain.</p> - -<p>"Miles Standish was a little man and at first the -Indians made fun of him. They thought he was -too small to be much of a warrior. But they found -they had made a mistake in this and learned to fear -him.</p> - -<p>"I think you children have never been to Plymouth. -Next summer I will take you there, if your -mother is willing. You shall stand on the rock -where people say the Pilgrims landed. Then we -will go up to the Memorial Hall and look at Baby -Peregrine's cradle and the chair of the first governor. -Dear me! I can't think of all the things<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">132</a></span> -saved from those first days of Plymouth. We will -see them all, though, and have a good time."</p> - -<p>"That will be jolly fun," said Joe, jumping up -and dancing around the room. "I wish it were next -summer now."</p> - -<p>"Don't be noisy Joe," said his sister. "Uncle -Sam won't tell us anything more, if you are."</p> - -<p>"I have told more now than you will remember, -my dear," said her old friend. "Before we leave -the Pilgrims, however, I must say one thing. After -they were well settled, friends from England came -to join them. This made them very happy.</p> - -<p>"A few years afterwards, still other people came -from England to live in this part of the country. -Their religion was not exactly the same as that of -the Pilgrims. They were called the Puritans. -They said:</p> - -<p>"'We do not wish to go out of the English -church. Yet we would like to make it <i>pure</i>. Some -things have grown up in it which we think are -wrong.'</p> - -<p>"There were many Puritans in England, but the -king would not listen to them. That is why they -made up their minds to come to America.</p> - -<p>"They were not poor like the Pilgrims. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">133</a></span> -brought plenty of clothes and furniture, horses, -cattle, and pigs, and everything they needed to make -themselves comfortable. They did not have to suffer -as the Pilgrims did.</p> - -<p>"The first Puritans came to Salem. They said:</p> - -<p>"'The word Salem means peace. It is a good -name for our new home.'</p> - -<p>"Hundreds of Puritans followed the first ones -who came to America. They settled in Boston and -other places near by. They built forts and schoolhouses, -besides homes for themselves.</p> - -<p>"They planted wheat and rye as well as Indian -corn. They cut down the forests and caught fish -and salted them. They bought furs from the -Indians, and sent them, as well as lumber and salt -fish, to England. The English people were glad to -buy these things and sent in return books, tools, and -other things the Puritans needed in their new -home."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam stopped to rest a moment. Then he -went on:</p> - -<p>"Maybe you think the Pilgrims were strict."</p> - -<p>Joe and Lucy nodded their heads.</p> - -<p>"Well, I suppose they were. We call their ways -old-fashioned, now-a-days. But if you had lived<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">134</a></span> -in their time, you would have been a good deal happier -with them than with the Puritans.</p> - -<p>"Strict! Why, the Puritans wanted to <i>make</i> -everybody believe just as they did. They did not -have any patience with those who did not agree with -them.</p> - -<p>"They had hard laws, too. They punished anyone -who swore, or even scolded. A high frame called -the stocks stood in the middle of every village. It -had a number of holes in it. Many of those who -did small wrongs had to sit all day with their legs -and arms through these holes. That was the way -they were held up to scorn.</p> - -<p>"Then there were ducking-stools. If women became -common scolds, they were bound to these -stools and ducked in a river or pond.</p> - -<p>"Once in a while a man was caught swearing. -It was a sad day for him. A split stick was fastened -on his tongue for hours together. If that did -not cure him, his tongue was burned with a red-hot -iron.</p> - -<p>"The children had a hard time of it in school as -well as at home. If they told wrong stories, they -had to hold out their tongues to be burnt with a -good dose of mustard."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">135</a></span></p> - -<p>Uncle Sam looked quite sad as he went on to tell -of a little girl who took something which belonged -to a playmate.</p> - -<p>"Her teacher held her fingers over red-hot coals -and burned them."</p> - -<p>"I don't believe children dared to turn round or -whisper in school very often," said Joe.</p> - -<p>"I should say not. If they did, a sudden rap -came upon their heads. It made them wish they -had not broken the rules."</p> - -<p>"I am glad I am alive now, and have such a lovely -home, and father and mother, and—"</p> - -<p>"Uncle Sam," said Joe, ending the sentence for -his sister.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">136</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER X<br /> -<span class="small">ROGER WILLIAMS</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">It</span> was snowing hard outside and the wind howled -around the little cottage.</p> - -<p>Joe and Lucy had been taking supper with Uncle -Sam. Lucy had made a big pile of buttered toast -and her mother had sent over a plum cake. They -were all eaten.</p> - -<p>"You must go home pretty soon, children. The -snow is drifting a good deal and it will be hard -walking. It is well that you both wore rubber -boots."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam got up and went to the window.</p> - -<p>"It was in just such weather that Roger Williams -made his way through the wilderness," he said as -he looked out over the fields.</p> - -<p>"I never heard of him before," said Joe.</p> - -<p>"Then it is time you did. It is not a very long -story. I don't believe it will do you any harm to -stay long enough to hear it. So here it is:</p> - -<p>"Roger Williams was one of the noblest men who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">137</a></span> -lived among the Puritans of long ago. He was -a young minister. He had fine thoughts of his -own. He did not need to have anyone else do his -thinking for him.</p> - -<p>"When he first came to America with his young -wife he settled in Boston. He afterwards went to -Salem. He preached in a little church there. He -said so many good things that people liked to hear -him.</p> - -<p>"After a while the Puritans began to open their -ears and their eyes, too. The leading men said:</p> - -<p>"'This man does not think just as we do. He -must be wrong.'</p> - -<p>"They were very angry. You remember what I -told you the other day about the Puritans?"</p> - -<p>"They wished everyone else to believe just as -they did," answered Joe.</p> - -<p>"And were very strict and solemn," added Lucy.</p> - -<p>"You must remember another thing, too. The -leading men of the church made all the laws for the -town. Roger Williams did not think this was -right. He was a minister himself, yet he believed -the church should have nothing to do with governing -the town.</p> - -<p>"Besides that, he thought, 'the King of England<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">138</a></span> -has no right to give the land in America to the -people who come here. The Indians hold the land. -It is theirs. They are the only ones who should -sell it or give it away.'</p> - -<p>"'Dreadful! dreadful!' said the people of Salem. -'Roger Williams cannot be true to the king if he -believes like that.'</p> - -<p>"The leading men made it so unpleasant for the -young minister that he left Salem. He went to -Plymouth and stayed among the Pilgrims for two -years. At the end of that time he went back to -Salem. He preached good sermons and the people -said:</p> - -<p>"'He has grown more careful in the use of his -tongue. He does not say unwise things any more.'</p> - -<p>"Yet Roger Williams had not changed his mind. -He believed just as he did before and he could not -help showing it.</p> - -<p>"'This man is not safe. He puts wrong thoughts -into the minds of the people,' said some of the leaders. -'We must send him back to England.'</p> - -<p>"Roger Williams heard what they intended to do. -He fled into the forests. It was very cold and -heavy snow had fallen. Who would be his friend -and help him in his troubles now?</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">139</a></span></p> - -<p>"Who indeed but his old friend Massasoit! The -Indians loved Williams. He had always been kind -and gentle with them. He had been honest in all -his dealings.</p> - -<p>"Massasoit was glad to give Williams a home. -He stayed with the Indian chief for some time. -He was busy thinking what he should do. Where -should he make a home for himself and those who -believed as he did?</p> - -<p>"'I will give you some land on the shores of a -river,' Massasoit told him.</p> - -<p>"As soon as the spring came Williams went to -this place. He set to work at once to build himself -a log house. Five of his friends came from Salem -to be with him.</p> - -<p>"They had not worked very long before they -found they would be safer to move to the other side -of the river. Then they would be sure of a place -where the white men could not trouble them.</p> - -<p>"They came to a wild and beautiful spot. The -trees of the forest grew all about it. The river -flowed close by.</p> - -<p>"The axes were soon swinging merrily and the -tall trees came falling to the earth. It was the beginning -of the city of Providence.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">140</a></span></p> - -<p>"Roger Williams gave it that name. He said: -'God has provided a home in the wilderness for -me.'</p> - -<p>"Not long after this a little son was born to him. -He, too, was named Providence. And when a baby -daughter came to the happy family, she was called -Mercy. In this way the good minister showed that -he did not forget the loving care of his Heavenly -Father.</p> - -<p>"Do not forget Roger Williams," Uncle Sam -ended as the children began to put on their rubber -boots. "He dared to say what he thought was -right when almost everyone was against him.</p> - -<p>"Be sure to remember this, too: He had no -trouble with the Indians, because he treated them -fairly. They lived in America before the white -people came, so he thought they had a better right -to the land than anyone else."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">141</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER XI<br /> -<span class="small">THE FATHER OF WATERS</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"Look</span>, Uncle Sam! See my lovely new -muff. I wanted one ever so much. My -hands get cold, even in my woolen mittens. Father -bought it for a birthday present. He got home -from Canada to-day."</p> - -<p>"What did he bring you, Joe?" Uncle Sam -asked after he had admired Lucy's muff.</p> - -<p>"A fur cap. It is a perfect beauty."</p> - -<p>"Father says Canada is a great place for hunters, -there are so many wild animals in the forests. He -was dreadfully cold while he was there. He is -glad to be home again."</p> - -<p>"Yes, the weather is colder there than it is here, -because it is farther north. Yet the cold did not -keep the Frenchmen from going to live in Canada -long ago. They were willing to suffer a little so -long as they could get rich by hunting and trapping, -and trading with the Indians.</p> - -<p>"They were the first white people to settle in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">142</a></span> -Canada. They called the country 'New France.'</p> - -<p>"They built stations here and there along the -shores of the St. Lawrence River. The Indians -used to bring loads of furs to sell to them. The -white men paid for the furs with hatchets, and -beads, and pieces of cloth. That was the kind of -money the Indians liked best.</p> - -<p>"The savages of Canada were always friendly to -the Frenchmen. They found that the settlers did -not wish to harm them and that they were treated -fairly. So there was no trouble.</p> - -<p>"The Frenchmen loaded ships with the furs they -bought and sent them home to France. They wrote -to their friends in the old country about the gentle -and friendly Indians. Some good French priests -heard the news. They said:</p> - -<p>"'We will cross the ocean and go to live among -the Indians. We will teach them about God and -about Christ, the Savior.'"</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam was so busy talking, he did not notice -Joe making signs to his sister. These signs said: -"We had better take off our coats and spend the -evening. I know Uncle Sam feels like telling a -story."</p> - - -<div class="figcenter"> - <img src="images/i_142.jpg" alt="Fur-trading" /> - <div class="caption"> - <span class="small">FUR-TRADING WITH THE FRENCH</span> - </div> -</div> - - -<p>Lucy understood her brother. In another minute<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">143</a></span> -she and Joe were sitting on either side of the old -man as he began to tell of the good priest Father -Marquette and what he found.</p> - -<p>It was a long time ago that Father Marquette -left France and came to Canada. Unlike the fur -traders, he had no wish to get rich. He was a -priest with a kind, loving heart. He cared only to -teach and help the Indians.</p> - -<p>As soon as he reached Canada, he asked many -questions about the Red Men. The fur traders told -him of some Indians who lived not far away. They -said:</p> - -<p>"These Indians are kind and honest. They will -treat you well."</p> - -<p>Marquette went to see them at once. They liked -him because he was gentle and good. They took -him into their homes. He lived with them for three -years.</p> - -<p>While he was there, he heard of a wonderful -river. The Indians called it "The Father of -Waters" because it was so long and wide. They -said it was far, very far, to the west of them. Other -Indians had told them about it. They thought it -would not be safe to sail down this river. Tribes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">144</a></span> -of fierce savages lived on its shores. They would -kill anyone who came among them.</p> - -<p>The good Marquette was not afraid. He only -thought: "These savage Indians have all the more -need of my teaching. I must go to them."</p> - -<p>A fur trader named Joliet, and five other men, -went with the priest. They traveled in canoes -made of birch bark. On they went, and still on. -Many days passed by. No Indians were seen as -yet.</p> - -<p>At last, they saw huts along the shore. These -must be the homes of the Red Men. In another -minute they heard cries of welcome. The Indians -came hurrying to meet their visitors. They had -heard of the good Marquette from their friends to -the eastward.</p> - -<p>They asked him to stay with them. They -begged him to go no farther or he would surely -come to harm. They repeated the stories he had -already heard,—the stories of fierce Red Men and -of wicked demons which would destroy him. Still -Marquette did not fear. He must not stop yet. -He and Joliet started out once more.</p> - -<p>They traveled for many days before they reached -the great Father of Waters. At last it met their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">145</a></span> -eyes. How different it was from the river on which -they had been traveling! The waters rushed along, -making a mighty noise. It was a wonder their little -canoe could be kept upright.</p> - -<p>The travelers now saw a path leading down to -the shore. It must be an Indian trail. They left -the canoe and followed the trail. They came to an -Indian village. Its people were afraid of the white -men and ran to hide behind the trees.</p> - -<p>Some of their chiefs were braver than the others -and came out to meet Marquette. They held out the -pipe of peace to him and his friend. When the -white men had smoked it and handed it back, they -knew there was nothing to fear.</p> - -<p>When the good priest asked about the great river, -the Indians told the same old story he had heard -so many times before.</p> - -<p>"You must go no farther. There are very bad -Red Men and many frightful monsters to the southward. -They will kill you and eat you if you go -among them."</p> - -<p>Marquette and Joliet paid no heed to these words. -Before they went on their journey, however, they -sat down to a great feast which the women had -prepared for them. A dish of mush came first.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">146</a></span> -The Indians fed it to the white men with big wooden -spoons. Broiled fish came next, but before it was -offered to the visitors the bones were carefully -taken out. After this a roasted dog was proudly -set before them. It was a great dainty to the Red -Men, but Marquette and Joliet would not taste it.</p> - -<p>"It is very queer," thought the Indians. They -could not understand how anyone should refuse to -eat roast dog.</p> - -<p>As soon as the feast was over, Marquette asked -the Great Spirit to bless these kind Indians. Then -he bade them good-bye and paddled away in his -canoe.</p> - -<p>The river grew wider and wider. Herds of buffaloes -were feeding along its shores. Some of -them stopped feeding long enough to look at the -two white men as they paddled past them.</p> - -<p>The daring travelers now came to a place where -high rocks reached up from the banks. Strange -figures were carved on the rocks. They were -painted in fearful colors. They had red eyes and -long beards. They had bodies like fishes. They -were ugly to look at. These must be the monsters -the white men had heard so much about.</p> - -<p>They were only pictures of monsters, however,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">147</a></span> -and not real ones. Yet the Indians all along the -river were afraid of them. Whenever the Red Men -had to pass the place, they offered prayers to these -hideous figures.</p> - -<p>On went the white men, and still on. The river -was growing wider all the time.</p> - -<p>At last they came to a place where the Indians -were savage and unfriendly. The travelers learned -that cruel Spaniards were not far away. After -Ponce de Leon discovered Florida the Spaniards -had claimed that country. They settled there as -well as in other parts of the south. They had some -villages near the lower part of the Mississippi. -Savage Indians and cruel Spaniards together made -the danger too great for the travelers.</p> - -<p>"We should only be made prisoners. Then we -could not go back and tell our friends about the -wonderful river." That is what the good priest -said to his friend.</p> - -<p>It was too bad, for they were told it would take -only five days more to reach the mouth of the river. -They had made a wonderful voyage already, so they -turned about and started homeward.</p> - -<p>Storms and cold weather now troubled them. -They were weak and half sick long before home was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">148</a></span> -in sight. The gentle priest was at last too ill to -travel any farther. He stopped with some friendly -Indians while Joliet went on to Canada.</p> - -<p>Everyone was filled with delight on hearing -about the great river. "It will belong to France, -because Frenchmen have discovered it," they said.</p> - -<p>Cannons were fired and bells were rung in the -city. It was a time of gladness.</p> - -<p>Poor Father Marquette was sick for a whole year. -Indeed, he was never entirely well afterwards. He -stayed among his Indian friends and taught them -till he died. They loved him very much and waited -upon the sick priest with the most tender care.</p> - -<p>"But this is not the whole story of 'The Father of -Waters,'" said Uncle Sam when he came to the -death of Marquette. "There was another brave -Frenchman who followed in the path of the priest. -I know you will like to hear about him."</p> - -<p>The children nodded their heads and Uncle Sam -began</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p2t p1b">THE STORY OF LA SALLE</p> - -<p>Once upon a time there was a brave young man -named Robert La Salle. He lived in France. He -was always ready for some new adventure. While -he was still young he thought:</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">149</a></span></p> - -<p>"I will join my countrymen in Canada and see -something of their strange life among the Indians."</p> - -<p>He was soon busy among the fur traders along -the St. Lawrence River and the great lakes. A -piece of land was given to him and he began to -build a fort. He was proud that the French people -held Canada. He wished to do his part in making -it strong so that all enemies could be kept out.</p> - -<p>Joliet came back from his long journey. He -told of the great Mississippi River. La Salle was -much excited over the news.</p> - -<p>La Salle said, "Our people must not only claim -this river, but we must also build forts and stations -along its shores. Then we can keep off the English -and Spaniards."</p> - -<p>His friends in Canada thought La Salle was the -very one to go back to France and tell the king -about Marquette's wonderful trip. He went to his -own country as soon as possible and stood before -his ruler.</p> - -<p>He painted a fine word-picture of what could be -done. The Englishmen and Spaniards had been -satisfied to live near the eastern and southern shores -of America. They might not always stay there. -Now was the chance for the French to enter the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">150</a></span> -heart of the country and make it their very own.</p> - -<p>The king was delighted at what he heard. He -praised La Salle and told the young Frenchman to -go back to Canada and work out his plans.</p> - -<p>La Salle lost no time in obeying the king. As -soon as he arrived on the St. Lawrence he went to -one of the lakes and began to build a boat. He -thought:</p> - -<p>"Canoes are not strong enough for the great -work before me. I must sail as far as possible -along the chain of great lakes. Then I shall not be -far from 'The Father of Waters'."</p> - -<p>He and his men worked hard. It was not long -before the boat was ready to launch. It seemed -very large to the Indians who came to see it start -on its first voyage. Never before had such a large -boat sailed on the lakes.</p> - -<p>La Salle had to make his way very carefully, for -he knew nothing about these strange waters. He -sailed through one great lake and passed safely into -the next one. Everything went well. Wherever -La Salle stopped, he met friendly Indians. They -were ready to trust their visitors, for Marquette -had been among them. How good he had been! -How tenderly they had loved him! All other white<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">151</a></span> -men must be good, too. This was what the Indians -thought.</p> - -<p>The vessel soon reached Green Bay, where Marquette -had spent a year among the Red Men.</p> - -<p>The Indians had many rich and beautiful furs -which they were ready to sell. La Salle ordered -his men to load the vessel with these furs as quickly -as possible. Then they were to sail back to Canada -and unload them. He and a few others would go -on their way in canoes.</p> - -<p>Alas! nothing happened as La Salle had hoped. -A terrible storm arose soon after the vessel started -back. The winds swept over the lake and the little -canoes drifted now one way, and now another. -Every moment it seemed as though people and -boats must be destroyed.</p> - -<p>After four days, however, the storm went down -and the men reached the shore. They were faint -from need of food and wet from head to foot. No -Indians were to be seen and they could find nothing -to eat. As soon as they had dried themselves, they -started on again. They hoped to find a village not -far away where they could get food.</p> - -<p>The poor tired men paddled on for some time<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">152</a></span> -more but no signs of Red Men nor of their huts -could be seen.</p> - -<p>"We will land and look about us," they said at -last. The canoes were hauled up on the shore while -La Salle and his men searched around.</p> - -<p>"Here are corn caves!" some one cried in delight.</p> - -<p>Sure enough, stores of corn were hidden away -among the rocks. The hungry men helped themselves -to the grain and made their way back to their -camp. They were careful to leave presents near -the caves. They would not think of stealing the -corn. The Red Men must be paid for it.</p> - -<p>A fire was soon blazing. The corn was ground -and cooked and they all sat down to eat. Suddenly -they heard a noise and two Indians appeared. The -Red Men held up the beads and cloth that the white -men had left as pay for the corn. They were as -happy over their presents as children are after Santa -Claus has paid them a visit.</p> - -<p>It was surely time now for the vessel to return. -La Salle watched for it in vain. It was never heard -of again. It must have been wrecked in the terrible -storm.</p> - -<p>After many days of waiting, the men begged to -turn back toward home. They were such a small<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">153</a></span> -company! There were so many dangers around -them, and the ship would never come to their help.</p> - -<p>Go back! La Salle could not think of such a -thing. He told his men they should set to work at -once to build a fort. They had little courage, but -they did as he ordered.</p> - -<p>As soon as they had finished Fort Break-Heart, -as they called it because they were so sad and discouraged, -a few men were left to hold it. The rest -of the party went on their way into the wild west.</p> - -<p>When they came to another good stopping place, -the men built another fort. It was hard work, for -they were sick and lonely.</p> - -<p>"It is of no use to go any further now," thought -La Salle. "Ice and snow are around us. The food -is scarce. Nothing can be done till spring comes -again. I will divide our small party into two parts. -Some of the men must stay here to hold the fort. -The rest of us will make our way back to Canada -to get provisions."</p> - -<p>It was a hard journey. The lakes and rivers were -caked with ice. The ground was covered with snow. -The brave La Salle and his men suffered from cold -and wet and hunger before they reached a place -where white men were living.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">154</a></span></p> - -<p>They told their story, got fresh stores, and once -more started off. La Salle did not know the word -"Fail."</p> - -<p>Sometimes he and his men paddled along in their -birch canoes. Sometimes they lifted their boats -upon their shoulders and made their way through -the woods.</p> - -<p>Danger was around them everywhere. Wild -animals roamed through the forest. Unfriendly -Indians might take them by surprise at any moment. -There were no roads,—no paths even. One thought -filled the mind of La Salle:</p> - -<p>"I must find the Mississippi. I must travel to its -very mouth. That is the only way by which France -can claim all the country on its shores."</p> - -<p>When the returning party reached Fort Break-Heart, -they found it torn down. Their friends -were not there. They thought those left to guard -it must have been killed or made prisoners by the -Indians.</p> - -<p>It was of no use to stop. They pushed on with -sad hearts.</p> - -<p>At last they had their reward. The great Mississippi -lay before them. La Salle's heart was full of -hope as the canoes were launched upon its waters.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">155</a></span></p> - -<p>On and on he paddled as Marquette had done before -him. He passed tribes of friendly Indians. -He came to others who were ready to kill the white -men. Still he pushed onward till the waters became -salt and rushed outward to the Gulf of Mexico. -The Frenchmen had at last reached the mouth of -the great river.</p> - -<p>Now came the homeward journey and the joy of -telling the good news to the people in Canada.</p> - -<p>La Salle did not rest even now. The king of -France must hear what he had done. He made -haste to sail across the ocean to his own country.</p> - -<p>The king said that ships must be made ready at -once. A large party of people should go to the -mouth of the river. They must build a fort and -settle there and take the country in the name of -France. La Salle was, of course, chosen to go -with them.</p> - -<p>They did not go by the way of Canada. They -went as straight as possible to the Gulf of Mexico. -La Salle thought it would not be hard to find the -mouth of the river.</p> - -<p>The voyage across the Atlantic was safely made. -The ships entered the Gulf of Mexico and sailed -along its shores. But La Salle could not find the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">156</a></span> -entrance of the Mississippi. He searched long and -carefully. Many times he thought it was in sight. -Many times he was disappointed.</p> - -<p>The food became scarce. One of the ships was -wrecked. The men said:</p> - -<p>"We had better give up the search and go back to -France."</p> - -<p>La Salle was left with a few men on the shore of -Texas. He still had hopes of finding the mouth of -the river.</p> - -<p>He wandered about for some time. Even now -he was not willing to give up.</p> - -<p>One day a very sad thing happened. The brave -leader, La Salle, was killed. And he was not killed -by the savages, but by one of his own men. They -were angry because he had brought them there. -This was the only reason they had for doing such a -mean and cruel deed.</p> - -<p>Such was the end of Robert La Salle.</p> - -<p>He did not do all he had hoped to do. Yet he -led the way for other Frenchmen, who afterwards -settled along the banks of the Mississippi.</p> - -<p>"The story has a very sad ending," said Lucy, -when Uncle Sam had finished. "I don't like to -have a story stop at such a sad place."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">157</a></span></p> - -<p>"I think it is one of the very best you have told -us," said Joe. "I wish I could have been with -La Salle a part of the time. It must have been -exciting, paddling through a strange country and -sleeping at night by the side of a big camp-fire."</p> - -<p>"I don't think you would have slept much at -first, with wolves howling and wildcats screeching -not far away," replied Uncle Sam. "Then how -would you have enjoyed going without food for -days together and having your clothes soaked -through in the heavy rains?"</p> - -<p>Even this unpleasant picture did not seem to -frighten Joe. He was a "regular boy," as his -mother said.</p> - -<p>"If you are going to have adventures, you must -take good and bad things together as they come," -he said.</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam was pleased with the answer.</p> - -<p>"That is true, my dear, but remember one thing: -No one should risk his life just for the sake of -adventure alone. Yet, if he is trying to do some -great and useful thing, as La Salle did, and cannot -help meeting dangers, he should be praised for meeting -them bravely and with a stout and trusting -heart."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">158</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER XII<br /> -<span class="small">THE STORY OF A YOUNG QUAKER</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"I</span> am so glad to see you again, Uncle Sam. It -seems as though we had been away a whole -year, yet it is not four weeks."</p> - -<p>Lucy talked very fast. Her cheeks were red as -roses and her lips were bright with excitement.</p> - -<p>"Only four weeks! Yes, that is all, but it has -been a long time to me," said Uncle Sam, as he bent -down to take Lucy in his arms.</p> - -<p>"You don't know how I have missed you children," -he added. "I have been a lonesome old man -without you."</p> - -<p>"We have ever so much to tell you," said Joe, -who had followed Lucy. "You know, this was -our first visit to Philadelphia. We had never seen -our great-aunt before, either. She has lived there -ever since she was a young girl."</p> - -<p>"She was so good, we began to love her at once," -Lucy went on. "She has a soft voice and she -wears a gray dress and a white kerchief around her<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">159</a></span> -neck all the time. When she spoke to me, she always -said thee or thou instead of you."</p> - -<p>"That was because she is a Quaker," Joe broke in.</p> - -<p>"I used to know your Aunt Rachel," said Uncle -Sam. "It was a long time ago, though. Now go -on and tell me all about your visit."</p> - -<p>The children had never heard that Uncle Sam -had once loved their Aunt Rachel very dearly. -Everyone thought they would be married. Then she -went from home on a visit. While she was away -she met a young Quaker who soon became her -husband.</p> - -<p>Perhaps Uncle Sam never got over his love for -the children's aunt. Anyway, he never married.</p> - -<p>"There are not very many Quakers in the country -now," said the old man as the children finished -telling him about their visit. "There was a time -when they were glad to come to America. It was -the only way they could have peace. Would you -like to hear about it?"</p> - -<p>"Of course, Uncle Sam. We are so tired from -our long journey we can hardly move. Nothing -would be nicer than to sit by your side and listen to -a story," said Joe.</p> - -<p>Lucy showed she thought so, too, by pressing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">160</a></span> -Uncle Sam's hand and looking up at him with a -pleased nod of her little head.</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam smiled and began the story of</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p2t p1b">WILLIAM PENN THE QUAKER</p> - -<p>A long time ago there was a rich man who lived -in England. He was an admiral in the English -navy and a great friend of the king.</p> - -<p>Admiral Penn had a son named William who was -bright and handsome. The boy had kind parents, -a lovely home, and plenty of money to spend. The -family was a very happy one until William went -away to college. It was then that he first went to a -meeting of the Quakers. He liked what he heard, -and he thought:</p> - -<p>"I, too, would like to be a Quaker."</p> - -<p>The Quakers believed quite differently from other -people in England. They were like the Pilgrims -in one thing,—they would not go to the regular -church of the country, but had a different service -among themselves. They thought everyone should -be free to worship God in his own manner. They -were quite different from the Pilgrims in other -ways, however. They thought it was wrong to -fight, even to save their country.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">161</a></span></p> - -<p>"One man should not take up arms against another," -they said. They believed it was not right -to dress in gay colors. They said it makes people -proud and vain.</p> - -<p>They spoke to each other simply, and used the -words thee and thou instead of you, after the manner -of the Bible. They called themselves "Friends," -not "Quakers." The word "Quaker" was at first -a "nickname," but is what they are now generally -called.</p> - -<p>It seems strange that a rich young man, brought -up as was William Penn, should care to join the -Quakers.</p> - -<p>He did care, however. He cared so much that -he did not change his mind even when he was driven -from his college because of what he believed.</p> - -<p>His father was very angry when he learned that -his loved son had joined with people who were -despised by nearly everyone else. How Penn's -mother must have wept and pleaded with him!</p> - -<p>It made no difference, however. The young -man had made up his mind what was right. He -could not change his belief, even to please his parents.</p> - -<p>When his father saw that words were of no use, -he told William to leave England and travel about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">162</a></span> -in Europe. He gave him plenty of money with -which he could enjoy himself. Admiral Penn -thought his son might forget the Quakers while -visiting other cities and having a good time.</p> - -<p>It was not so, however. Soon after William -Penn came home, he was sent to Ireland on business. -While he was there he went to several Quaker -meetings. He was arrested and put in prison because -he was found in these places. It was against -the law for the Friends to hold meetings or to attend -them.</p> - -<p>When Penn was free once more, his father sent -for him to come home. He said:</p> - -<p>"I will forgive you everything if you will promise -to do three things: Take off your hat to the King, -the King's brother, and to myself, your father."</p> - -<p>William Penn said he would think about it. He -could not promise at once, for the Friends did not -think it right to take off one's hat to certain people; -all persons should be treated with the same honor.</p> - -<p>After a while the young man came to his father -and said:</p> - -<p>"I cannot do as you wish."</p> - -<p>His father was so angry that he turned his son -out of doors. Young Penn would have had a sad<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">163</a></span> -time if his mother had not sent him money to keep -him from want.</p> - -<p>He began to preach in the streets of the city. He -hoped other people would listen to him and also -become Quakers. It was not long before he was -arrested again. He was put in the Tower of London -for breaking the law. His cell in the Tower -was a dark and dreadful place.</p> - -<p>The king's brother was a great friend of William -Penn. He tried hard to have the young man set -free. At last he brought it about.</p> - -<p>Penn's father died soon after his son came out of -prison. William was now a rich man. He went -again and again to the king, begging that Quakers -should not be whipped or put in prison.</p> - -<p>At last he spoke of money which the king had -owed his father. He said:</p> - -<p>"You need not pay this money back to me if you -will give me land in America where the Quakers can -have a free and happy home."</p> - -<p>The king was willing to do this, for he owed a -good deal of money and found it hard to pay his -debts.</p> - -<p>The poor Quakers were allowed to come out of -prison and seek a home across the ocean. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">164</a></span> -called the country that the king had given Penn, -Pennsylvania, which means Penn's woods.</p> - -<p>It could have had no better name. The country -was covered with thick woods, and the settlers had -gained it through the kindness of William Penn.</p> - -<p>He came to Pennsylvania the year after the first -settlers reached it. He did not try to rule over his -people. He said they should make their own laws. -He told them he wished the new home to be free to -all. It did not matter what a person believed. He -should live in Pennsylvania in peace and happiness.</p> - -<p>He helped the Friends to lay out a city which -they called Philadelphia. That meant the city of -Brotherly Love.</p> - -<p>They had no trouble with the Indians. Penn sent -word to the near-by tribes that he wished to meet -their chiefs. He said he meant no harm to them. -He would punish anyone who did a wrong to an -Indian. He was willing to pay them for the land -where his people had settled.</p> - -<p>One by one the chiefs arrived. They were all -well armed and grand with paint and feathers. They -sat in a half-moon under a large elm tree. Penn -stood in their midst. He had no weapons whatever. -The branches of the tall elm tree waved<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">165</a></span> -gently overhead while the Quaker talked with the -Red Men and smoked the peace-pipe with them. -He said:</p> - -<p>"I will not call you my children, because fathers -sometimes whip their children. I will not call you -brothers, because brothers sometimes quarrel. But -I will call you the same as we say of the white -people,—Friends."</p> - -<p>He told them he and his people would treat them -honestly. They wished for peace always, and -would do nothing to break it.</p> - -<p>Before the meeting was over, the Indians promised -to keep that peace and to harm no Quaker. -They gave Penn a belt of wampum. Wampum was -very precious to the Indians. It was made of peculiar -shells. Penn's belt was made of white ones. -It had a picture in the middle made with purple -shells. This picture showed a white man and an -Indian shaking hands.</p> - -<p>The Red Men kept their promise. When they -became old and ready to die, they repeated it to -their children, who also promised. Thus the -Friends lived in peace with the Indians, and Pennsylvania -was the happy home of many people.</p> - -<p>Penn stayed a long time with his settlers. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">166</a></span> -often went to visit the Indians in their villages. -He joined them in their feasts. He played with -their children. The Red Men loved and trusted -him.</p> - -<p>When years passed by and the white men in -other places had bloody wars with the Indians, the -Quakers among them were not harmed. The white -feather of peace was placed over the door of every -house where Quakers were living. That was the -Red Man's sign for these words:</p> - -<p>"No one here must meet with any harm. The -Red Man is his friend."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">167</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER XIII<br /> -<span class="small">LORD BALTIMORE AND THE CATHOLICS</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"There</span> are three churches in our village. -Look, Uncle Sam, we can see the spires of -all of them lighted by the sunset."</p> - -<p>"The sun does not have any favorites," was the -reply. "He treats all alike."</p> - -<p>"Let me see. One is the Methodist, another the -Congregational, and the third is the Catholic -church," Joe went on.</p> - -<p>"They have different names, yet they were all -built for one use,—the worship of God."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam spoke softly as he looked from Joe -to his sister.</p> - -<p>"The <i>name</i> of the church does not matter so -much, so long as people seek it for the right reason," -he went on. "There was a time when people were -not free to choose their church. You remember -the Pilgrims and the Quakers, and how much -trouble they had.</p> - -<p>"Then there were the Catholics. They could not -be happy in England any more than the Pilgrims.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">168</a></span> -They heard stories of the great land across the -ocean. They envied the free life of the Pilgrims -and they thought:</p> - -<p>"'Why should not we, too, find such a home?'</p> - -<p>"Lord Baltimore was one of their leading men. -The king was very fond of him. When he asked -that Catholics might seek a home in America with -him, the king was quite willing. He told Lord -Baltimore they might go with him to Newfoundland. -More than that! Lord Baltimore should rule over -them with as much power as a king. He should -make the laws and punish people who did wrong. -He need not ask the king about anything he wanted -to do.</p> - -<p>"'Newfoundland is a beautiful country,' said the -Catholics. 'At least that is what we have been told -by the sea-captains who have been there.'</p> - -<p>"One of these captains had visited Newfoundland -in the summer time. He wrote a book about the -place. He told of the berries and roses, the birds, -and the pleasant weather. He did not know that -winters on the island are long and cold.</p> - -<p>"Lord Baltimore and his party went to Newfoundland -with hearts full of hope. Alas! at the -end of the first winter they said:</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">169</a></span></p> - -<p>"'We cannot make our home here. We suffer too -much from the cold and bad weather.'</p> - -<p>"It is no wonder they felt so. Ten of their people -had died. Many others had been sick. Lord -Baltimore himself was one of these last.</p> - -<p>"He wrote a letter to the king telling of his -troubles. He now asked for land in Virginia. -Then he bade good-bye to Newfoundland and sailed -south. He wished to find out if Virginia was as -good a country as he had been told it was.</p> - -<p>"He was not disappointed this time. It was all -he had hoped.</p> - -<p>"When the people of Virginia heard that Catholics -wished to settle among them, they sent word -to the king of England that they did not like the -plan at all. Then the king said:</p> - -<p>"'I will give the land north of Virginia to Lord -Baltimore.'</p> - -<p>"When the second party was ready to leave England, -their good friend was dead. His son took his -place as governor.</p> - -<p>"'How beautiful this place is!' thought the travelers -as they sailed up the Potomac River after a -long and dangerous voyage.</p> - -<p>"'You should call the country I have given you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">170</a></span> -Maryland, or the Land of Mary,' the king had told -them. This was in honor of the Queen Henrietta -Maria.</p> - -<p>"It was because of this that their new home was -called Maryland.</p> - -<p>"The party landed first on an island. A large -cross was set up in the ground and the priests gave -thanks to God for bringing them all safely across the -ocean.</p> - -<p>"As they sailed up the river, they saw Indians -along the shores. The Red Men did not look kindly -at the strangers. They seemed ready to make war. -The governor thought:</p> - -<p>"'This will never do. We must not fight if we -can help it. We must show the savages that we -wish to be friends.'</p> - -<p>"He acted so wisely that fear and anger left the -hearts of the savages. They put their bows and -arrows aside and began to help the newcomers.</p> - -<p>"One day as some of the settlers were out on an -excursion, a stranger appeared among them. His -skin was so dark, and he was dressed so strangely, -they thought at first that he was an Indian.</p> - -<p>"He spoke to them in English, however, and explained -who he was. His name was Captain Henry<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">171</a></span> -Fleet. He had been living among the Red Men. -He had once been their prisoner. He gave the -strangers good advice. He said to them:</p> - -<p>"'Do not settle on the island where you are now -living. I know another place you would like much -better. It is on the shore of the main land. Some -Indians have a village there. They are kind and -gentle. I think they will be willing to sell their -home to you.'</p> - -<p>"It was a good plan. The white people went to -the place and were much pleased with it. It was -in a lovely valley near the shore. Springs of cool -water bubbled up here and there. Groves of nut -and oak trees gave a pleasant shade. No fierce wild -animals roamed through the forest near by. They -must find out at once if the Indians would be willing -to sell such a pleasant home.</p> - -<p>"They brought cloth, tools, and beads to the Red -Men. They said:</p> - -<p>"'We will give you all these things in return for -your village place.'</p> - -<p>"The eyes of the Indians sparkled with delight. -Cloth, tools, and beads were the very things they -most wished for. They were quite ready to move<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">172</a></span> -away if they could have all these. They said to -the strangers:</p> - -<p>"'We will share our village with you till the harvest -is ripe. Then we will gather it and go somewhere -else and leave you here alone.'</p> - -<p>"Everyone was pleased and the white people settled -themselves in the huts of the Indians. All -lived together in happiness till the season came to an -end. Then the Indians moved away, but they -showed themselves kind neighbors ever after.</p> - -<p>"The white men built houses and planted gardens. -They were more happy and comfortable than they -had ever been before in their lives.</p> - -<p>"They went back and forth among their savage -neighbors without fear. Their priests taught the -red children and baptized many of them. One of -the Indian chiefs trusted the white people so much -that he sent his little daughter to live with them. -He said:</p> - -<p>"'When I am dead she will rule over my people. -She will be a wiser ruler if she is brought up by the -white men. They will teach her many things she -cannot learn in our village.'</p> - -<p>"So it happened one bright morning that the little -Indian maiden left her home in the forest. She<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">173</a></span> -sprang into her light canoe and paddled down the -river. She soon came to the English village.</p> - -<p>"The white people were very kind. Yet how -strange their ways must have seemed to her!</p> - -<p>"She took off the soft moccasins in which she -could run so easily. She put on leather shoes such -as the English children wore. They must have -seemed very stiff and uncomfortable at first.</p> - -<p>"Her dress of beaver-skin and the pretty feather -mantle, of which she was so proud, were laid aside. -She must now wear skirts and waists, like the other -girls around her.</p> - -<p>"Now, too, she must spend a large part of each -day in the house, for she had to study lessons in -books. She must also learn to cook and sew and -knit.</p> - -<p>"Poor little Indian girl! How different all this -was from her old free life in the forest. Then the -birds and bees, the rabbits and squirrels, were -around her from morning until night. No hat of -any kind kept the soft breezes from blowing through -her hair."</p> - -<p>"She must have been very homesick," said Lucy, -when Uncle Sam reached this part of the story. "I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">174</a></span> -shouldn't wonder if she cried herself to sleep every -night."</p> - -<p>"It is not Indian fashion to cry," replied Uncle -Sam. "The Red Men are ashamed to let tears -come to their eyes. Even the little children are -taught not to show in their faces what they feel.</p> - -<p>"This little girl may have been very unhappy at -first. I really don't know about that. At any -rate, she lived among the white people till she grew -up. Then she married a white man, just as Pocahontas -did."</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam stopped for a moment and began to -stroke his chin. That was the sign that he was -thinking.</p> - -<p>Lucy began to pet Buzz, who had just waked up -from a nap at her feet. She was thinking, too. It -seemed as though she could see that little Indian -girl of long ago. The child was in a birch canoe -and gliding down the river. Her bright black eyes -were turned longingly toward her home in the forest. -Those eyes seemed to say:</p> - -<p>"Good-bye, dear, happy days of freedom. Good-bye."</p> - -<p>Joe sat thinking, too. He was wondering if the -Indian girl went back to her people with her white<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">175</a></span> -husband, and if she was a good ruler after her -father died.</p> - -<p>"A penny for your thoughts!" said Uncle Sam -suddenly. He spoke to Joe.</p> - -<p>"I can't imagine that Indian princess ruling her -people after the white man's fashion. I do not believe -it would have suited the Indians." The boy -spoke slowly.</p> - -<p>"I think you are right, Joe," Uncle Sam answered. -"But I believe she did not have a chance -to try. The Indians were not willing to let a -woman take the old chief's place. They chose his -brother, I believe.</p> - -<p>"Now I will tell you what I was thinking of myself. -When I spoke of Pocahontas, I went on to -think of the people of Virginia. You might say -they lived next door to Maryland. They had a -great deal of trouble with the Indians, while their -neighbors in Maryland did not have any.</p> - -<p>"The people of Maryland lived in peace and let -others come to settle among them. It did not matter -whether these newcomers were Catholics like -themselves, or Quakers, or Puritans. Anyone who -wished was allowed to live with them and believe -as he liked.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">176</a></span></p> - -<p>"The only trouble they did have was with Virginia. -It was about an island in the river. Both -colonies claimed that island. They even had battles -with each other before the trouble was settled. -Maryland was not much to blame, however. Her -people always seemed to wish for peace.</p> - -<p>"A happier colony never settled in America than -the Catholics who came to Maryland because of their -kind friend Lord Baltimore."</p> - - - - -<hr /> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">177</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2>CHAPTER XIV<br /> -<span class="small">THE POOR DEBTORS</span></h2> -</div> - -<p class="drop"><span class="uppercase">"This</span> is the last chance for a story for a long -time and I am sorry," said Joe.</p> - -<p>Lucy looked sad too. She was sorry to have -Uncle Sam go away.</p> - -<p>"We shall miss the nice stories, but we shall miss -you even more than the stories," she said, putting -her arms around her old friend's neck.</p> - -<p>Uncle Sam had been called to New York on business. -He might be gone two months. It might -even be a longer time than that. He could not tell. -He looked from one child to the other with a face -beaming with love.</p> - -<p>"One more story. Yes, that is all. Then you -children will have time to think over what I have -told you. And when I come back you will be ready -to hear some more. It is a good thing, after all, for -me to go away and give you a rest.</p> - -<p>"You see, children, I get wound up just like a -clock. If I once get to going, I can't stop unless -something makes me."</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">178</a></span></p> - -<p>"Give us a rest, indeed!" cried Joe. "Lucy and -I are not babies. We like stories that mean something, -now that we are nine years old. Besides, -you could not tire us anyway, Uncle Sam."</p> - -<p>The old man looked pleased.</p> - -<p>"Well, well, I am glad to hear it. But it is almost -dark already. I will begin at once with the -story I promised for this evening.</p> - -<p>"It is about some poor people in England who -were shut up in prisons. They were not wicked. -They had not stolen nor done any other dreadful -deed. Yet the prison doors were tightly locked -upon them and they were shut out from the beauty -of this great world.</p> - -<p>"You shall hear why these people were not free. -They owed money and were not able to pay it back. -In the old days in England there were many poor -people. It was hard to earn a living. Some of -those who tried the hardest, could get no work. -Then, of course, they did not have money. Yet -they needed food and clothing for their families the -same as ever. They could not let them starve.</p> - -<p>"It is no wonder they got into debt. If the debt -was not soon paid, they were taken from their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">179</a></span> -homes. 'Stay in prison till you pay what you owe.' -This was the cruel law."</p> - -<p>"But how <i>could</i> they earn any money while they -were in prison?" cried Joe.</p> - -<p>"It was impossible, of course. That is why the -law was such a bad one. By and by a very good -man went to visit the prisons. His name was James -Oglethorpe.</p> - -<p>"He saw the poor debtors and pitied their sad -case. He wished to help them. He thought of -America. It had already given homes to many -unhappy people. He went to the king of England -and said:</p> - -<p>"'Will you let the debtors come out of prison and -go with me to America? They can have a fresh -start and make a new home for themselves there. -You will then have no more trouble with them.'</p> - -<p>"The king listened kindly to Oglethorpe's plan. -It seemed a good one. He promised to give land -in America to these people and said that Oglethorpe -should be their governor.</p> - -<p>"Not long afterwards, the debtors were set free. -How glad they were to be with their own families -once more! How thankful they must have been to -James Oglethorpe who had done so much for them!</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">180</a></span></p> - -<p>"When they left England for America, their good -friend went too, so that he might give them his -wise help. Their new home was farther south than -that of any other English people in this country at -that time. It lay next to Florida. The Spaniards -were their neighbors.</p> - -<p>"The new colony was given the name of Georgia, -in honor of George, the king of England.</p> - -<p>"The first day in the new home was given up to -prayer. All gave thanks to God for bringing them -here in safety. Then came weeks of good hard -work. Houses were built, a wall was made around -the village, and a fort stood ready in case of an -attack by enemies, red or white.</p> - -<p>"General Oglethorpe was a wise governor. He -made just laws for his people. He drilled the men -every day in order to make them good soldiers in -case they needed to fight.</p> - -<p>"He treated the Indians so kindly they did not -wish to make war upon his people. There was one -chief whose name was Tomachichi. He loved -General Oglethorpe very dearly. One day he -brought a present for the governor. It was the -skin of a buffalo with the feathers of an eagle painted -on it.</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">181</a></span></p> - -<p>"Tomachichi said: 'The skin of the buffalo is -warm. The feathers of the eagle are soft. These -things therefore mean love and protection. The -English are swift as the eagle and strong as the -buffalo.'</p> - -<p>"Tomachichi afterwards visited England with -General Oglethorpe. His wife and nephew went -with him. How strange the crowded streets and -large buildings of London must have seemed to these -savages!</p> - -<p>"Soon after Oglethorpe settled in Georgia, he invited -the chiefs of the near-by Indian tribes to meet -together with him. At this meeting he asked them -to keep peace with him and his people. They were -quite willing to do as he asked.</p> - -<p>"Then he gave each one of them a fine coat, a hat -trimmed with lace, and a shirt. They must have -felt grand indeed when they put on such elegant -clothes.</p> - -<p>"Oglethorpe noticed many mulberry trees growing -in Georgia. He said:</p> - -<p>"'Silkworms feed on mulberry leaves. It would -be a good plan for the next ship that comes from -England to bring some silkworms. Then we can -make silk. We can sell it for a good price.'</p> - - <p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">182</a></span></p> - -<p>"The silkworms were brought and silk was made. -It was sent over to England and the queen herself -had a dress made of American silk. She wore it -on the king's birthday.</p> - -<p>"After a while, however, the people gave up raising -silkworms in Georgia. It did not pay. They -found they could get more money by cutting lumber -in the forests and trading for furs with the Indians. -They sent these things to other countries and were -paid well for them.</p> - -<p>"As long as General Oglethorpe was in Georgia -the settlers had two good laws. He would not -allow rum or slaves to be brought into the country. -He was a kind and wise governor in every way.</p> - -<p>"And now, children," said Uncle Sam, "don't -you know enough about your country to think the -words of the old song are true? Can you see that -it is really the 'Land of the Free and the home of the -Brave?'"</p> - -<p>"Indeed yes, Uncle Sam," cried Joe and Lucy -together.</p> - -<p>"There is no country in the wide world like ours," -added Joe with a positive shake of his head.</p> - -<p>"Very well, then. Let's sing 'America' with a -heart and a will," said Uncle Sam. "We can sit<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">183</a></span> -right here on the porch while we sing it. We don't -need the organ to help us out."</p> - -<p>The birds had already gone to sleep. But several -of them waked up in the tree-top near by and added -a cheerful chirp to the voices of the three earnest -singers.</p> - - -<p class="center in0 p2t">THE END.</p> - - - - -<hr /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="transnote"> -<h2 class="nobreak p1">Transcriber's Note</h2> - -<p>Obvious typographical errors have been silently corrected. Variations in hyphenation have been standardised but all other spelling and punctuation remains unchanged.</p> -</div> -</div> - - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The Coming of the White Men, by Mary Hazelton Wade - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE COMING OF THE WHITE MEN *** - -***** This file should be named 55959-h.htm or 55959-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/9/5/55959/ - -Produced by Larry B. Harrison and The Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9907ef6..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/i_036.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/i_036.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 40ce01c..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/i_036.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/i_068.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/i_068.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index df805a6..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/i_068.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/i_102.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/i_102.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c93488b..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/i_102.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/i_142.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/i_142.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 112ccca..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/i_142.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/i_frontis.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/i_frontis.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9ca11eb..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/i_frontis.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55959-h/images/i_title.jpg b/old/55959-h/images/i_title.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f43f63b..0000000 --- a/old/55959-h/images/i_title.jpg +++ /dev/null |
